Brother HL-3040CN-HL3045CN-HL3070CW-HL3075CW Service Manual

Color Printer
SERVICE MANUAL
MODEL: HL-3040CN/3045CN
HL-3070CW/3075CW
Read this manual thoroughly before maintenance work.

Keep this manual in a convenient place for quick and easy reference at all times.
July 2009
SM-PRN073
84E201
(6)
Confidential
TRADEMARKS
The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.

Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
PCL is either a trademark or a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company in the United States
and other countries.
Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States and other countries.
PostScript and PostScript3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered mark.
Citrix and MetaFrame are registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. in the United States.
Intel, Intel Xeon and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
AMD, AMD Athlon, AMD Opteron and combinations thereof, are trademarks of Advanced Micro
Devices, Inc.
PictBridge is a trademark.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement
specific to its proprietary programs.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
The function comparative table for models as described in this Service Manual are shown below.
Model HL-3040CN HL-3045CN HL-3070CW HL-3075CW
LAN Wired Wired Wireless Wireless
USB host --- --- √ √
© Copyright Brother 2009

All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form or by
any means without permission in writing from the publisher.
All other product and company names mentioned in this manual

are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Confidential
PREFACE
This service manual contains basic information required for after-sales service of the printer
(hereinafter referred to as “the machine”). This information is vital to the service personnel to
maintain the high printing quality and performance of the machine.
This service manual covers the HL-3040CN/3045CN/3070CW/3075CW machines.
This manual consists of the following chapters:
CHAPTER 1: SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter lists the specifications of each model.
CHAPTER 2: THEORY OF OPERATION

Gives an overview of the printing mechanisms as well as the sensors, actuators, and control
electronics. It aids in understanding the basic principles of operations as well as locating
defects for troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 3: ERROR INDICATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Details of error messages and codes that the incorporated self-diagnostic function of the
machine will display if any error or malfunction occurs. If any error message appears, refer to
this chapter to find which parts should be checked or replaced.
The latter half of this chapter provides sample problems that could occur in the main sections
of the machine and related troubleshooting procedures.
CHAPTER 4: PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

Details of consumable parts and periodical maintenance parts. This chapter also covers
procedures for disassembling and assembling periodical maintenance parts.
CHAPTER 5: DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

Details of procedures for disassembling and assembling of the machine together with related
notes. The disassembly order flow provided enables you to see at a glance the quickest way
to get to parts involved.
At the start of a disassembly job, you can check the disassembly order flow that guides you
through a shortcut to get to the object parts.
This chapter also covers screw tightening torques and lubrication points to which the specified
lubrications should be applied during assembly jobs.
CHAPTER 6: ADJUSTMENTS AND UPDATING OF SETTINGS,

REQUIRED AFTER PARTS REPLACEMENT
Details of adjustments and updating of settings, which are required if the main PCB and some
other parts have been replaced. This chapter also covers how to update the firmware.
i Confidential
CHAPTER 7: SERVICE FUNCTIONS
Describes the maintenance mode which is exclusively designed for the purpose of checking
the settings and adjustments using the buttons on the control panel.
This chapter also covers not-disclosed-to-users function menus, which activate settings and
functions or reset the parts life.
CHAPTER 8: CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS & WIRING DIAGRAM

Provides the Circuit Diagrams and Wiring Diagram for the connections of the PCBs.
APPENDIX 1: WORKER SWITCH (WSW)

Describes the functions of the worker switches.
APPENDIX 2: DELETION OF USER SETTING INFORMATION etc.

Provides instructions on how to delete user setting information etc. stored in the machine.
APPENDIX 3: SERIAL NUMBERING SYSTEM
APPENDIX 4: SCREW CATALOGUE
APPENDIX 5: REFERENCES
APPENDIX 6: GLOSSARY
Information in this manual is subject to change due to improvement or redesign of the product.
All relevant information in such cases will be supplied in service information bulletins (Technical
Information).
A thorough understanding of this machine, based on information in this service manual and
service information bulletins, is required for maintaining its print quality performance and for
improving the practical ability to find the cause of problems.
ii Confidential
REGULATION
For Europe and Other Countries
■ Radio interference (220 to 240 volt model only)

This machine follows EN55022 (CISPR Publication 22)/Class B.
Before you use this product, make sure that you use the following interface cable.
- A USB cable.
The cable must not be more than 2 meters long.
■ EU Directive 2002/96/EC and EN50419

(European Union only)
This equipment is marked with the recycling symbol below. It means that at the end of the life
of the equipment you must dispose of it separately at an appropriate collection point and not
place it in the normal domestic unsorted waste stream. This will benefit the environment for all.
iii Confidential
For USA and Canada
■ Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of Conformity
(For USA)
Responsible Party: Brother International Corporation
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard
P.O. Box 6911
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911
USA
Telephone: (908) 704-1700
declares, that the products
Product name: Printer HL-3040CN, HL-3045CN, HL-3070CW and HL-3075CW
Model number: HL-30C
complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Important
A shielded interface cable should be used to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class B
digital device. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries, Ltd.
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
■ Industry Canada Compliance Statement (For Canada)

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
iv Confidential
SAFETY INFORMATION
■ Definitions of Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Memos

The following conventions are used in this manual:
Mark Contents
Warnings tell you what to do to prevent possible personal injury.
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to a possible electrical shock.
Hot Surface icons warn you not to touch machine parts that are hot.
Cautions specify procedures you must follow or avoid to prevent

possible damage to the machine or other objects.
Note Notes tell you useful tips when servicing the machine.
Memo Memo tells you bits of knowledge to help understand the machine.
v Confidential
■ Safety Precautions
Listed below are the various kinds of “WARNING” messages included in this manual.
WARNING
There are high voltage electrodes inside the machine. Before you clean the inside of the
machine or replace parts, make sure that you have turned off the power switch and
unplugged the machine from the AC power outlet.
DO NOT handle the plug with wet hands. Doing this might cause an electrical shock.
The fuser unit becomes extremely hot during operation. Wait until it has cooled down suffi-
ciently before replacing consumable items. DO NOT remove or damage the caution label
located on or around the fuser.
vi Confidential
WARNING
DO NOT use flammable substances, any type of spray or any organic solvent/liquids
contains alcohol or ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the machine. Doing this may
cause a fire or electrical shock.
If the machine becomes hot, blows smoke, or generates obscure odor, immediately turn off
the power switch and unplug the machine from the AC power outlet.
If metal objects, water or other liquids get inside the machine, immediately turn off the
power switch and unplug the machine from the AC power outlet.
This machine is heavy and weighs approximately 19.0 kg (41.9 lb). To prevent injuries
when moving or lifting this machine, make sure to use at least two people. Be careful not to
pinch your fingers when you set the machine back down.
CAUTION
Lightning and power surges can damage this product! We recommend that you use a
quality surge protection device on the AC power line, or unplug the machine during a
lightning storm.
Violently closing the top cover without mounting the toner cartridge and the drum unit can
damage this product.
vii Confidential
CHAPTER 1
SPECIFICATIONS
Confidential
CHAPTER 1
SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter lists the specifications of each model.
CONTENTS
1. COMPONENTS ..........................................................................................1-1
2. SPECIFICATIONS LIST .............................................................................1-2

2.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 1-2
2.2 Network Connectivity .................................................................................................. 1-7
2.3 Service Information................................................................................................... 1-11
2.4 Consumables............................................................................................................ 1-12
2.5 Paper ........................................................................................................................ 1-13
2.5.1 Paper handling ................................................................................................ 1-13
2.5.2 Media specifications ........................................................................................ 1-13
2.5.3 Type and size of paper .................................................................................... 1-14
2.6 Printable Area ........................................................................................................... 1-15
2.7 Print Speeds with Various Settings ........................................................................... 1-23
Confidential
1. COMPONENTS
Top cover sub ASSY
Top cover arm R
LED head control

LED ASSY PCB ASSY
Top cover arm L
Paper eject guide ASSY
Fuser cover
Fuser unit
Back cover
Side cover R ASSY
LVPS unit Main fan ASSY
Registration sensor
holder ASSY
LV fan ASSY
Fuser eject drive Toner LED

ASSY PCB ASSY
High-voltage power
Side frame L supply PCB ASSY
Belt drive unit
HVPS control
PCB ASSY
Side frame R
Main PCB ASSY Waste toner sensor
holder ASSY
Paper feed
unit
Toner/New sensor
PCB ASSY
Control panel
cover ASSY
USB direct interface

Side cover L ASSY relay PCB ASSY
Access cover Drum develop

drive unit
Front cover ASSY
Engine PCB ASSY
Paper tray
Fig. 1-1
1-1 Confidential
2. SPECIFICATIONS LIST
2.1 General
Model HL-3040CN HL-3070CW HL-3045CN HL-3075CW
Print method Electrophotographic LED color printer
Resolution 2,400 dpi Windows Server® 2008, Windows® 7, Windows Server®
(600 (main Windows Vista®, Windows 2008 R2, Windows Server®
scanning) Server® 2003 x64 Edition, 2008, Windows Vista®,
x 2,400 Windows® XP Professional x64 Windows Server® 2003 x64
(sub Edition, Windows Server® 2003, Edition, Windows® XP
scanning)) Windows® XP Home Edition/ Professional x64 Edition,
quality Professional, Windows® 2000, Windows Server® 2003,
Mac OS® X 10.3.9 or greater Windows® XP Home Edition/
Professional, Mac OS® X
10.4.11,10.5.x, 10.6.x
600 (main Windows Windows Windows® 7, Windows® 7,
scanning) Server® 2008, Server® 2008, Windows Windows
x 600 (sub Windows Windows Server® 2008 Server® 2008
scanning)) Vista®, Vista®, R2, Windows R2, Windows
dpi Windows Windows Server® 2008, Server® 2008,
Server® 2003 Server® 2003 Windows Windows
x64 Edition, x64 Edition, Vista®, Vista®,
Windows® XP Windows® XP Windows Windows
Professional Professional Server® 2003 Server® 2003
x64 Edition, x64 Edition, x64 Edition, x64 Edition,
Windows Windows Windows® XP Windows® XP
Server® 2003, Server® 2003, Professional Professional
Windows® XP Windows® XP x64 Edition, x64 Edition,
Home Edition/ Home Edition/ Windows Windows
Professional, Professional, Server® 2003, Server® 2003,
Windows® Windows® Windows® XP Windows® XP
2000, Mac 2000, Mac Home Edition/ Home Edition/
OS® X 10.3.9 OS® X 10.3.9 Professional, Professional,
or greater, or greater, Mac OS® X Mac OS® X
Linux DOS, Linux 10.4.11,10.5.x, 10.4.11,10.5.x,
10.6.x, Linux 10.6.x, DOS,
Linux
Print mode Normal printing mode
Economy printing mode (Toner saving mode)
Print One side Monochrome/Full Color: Monochrome/Full Color:
Speed Up to 16/16 ppm (A4 size), Up Up to 18/18 ppm (A4 size), Up
to 17/17 ppm (Letter size) to 19/19 ppm (Letter size)
* When loading A4 or Letter- * When loading A4 or Letter-
size paper from the paper tray. size paper from the paper tray.
Duplex N/A
Note:
Print speed varies depending on the paper size or media type. For details, refer to
“2.7 Print Speeds with Various Settings” in this chapter.
1-2 Confidential
Warm-up time*1 From Sleep Mode: Less than 27 seconds
From Power OFF → ON: Less than 37 seconds
First print time*1 Monochrome: Less than 15 seconds
Full Color: Less than 16 seconds
CPU 300 MHz
Memory Standard 32 MB 64 MB 32 MB 64 MB
Option 1 DIMM slot; 1 DIMM slot; 1 DIMM slot; 1 DIMM slot;
expandable up expandable up expandable up expandable up
to 544 MB to 576 MB to 544 MB to 576 MB
Interface Hi-Speed USB Hi-Speed USB Hi-Speed USB Hi-Speed USB
2.0, Ethernet 2.0, Ethernet 2.0, Ethernet 2.0, Ethernet
10/100 BASE- 10/100 BASE- 10/100 BASE- 10/100 BASE-
TX TX, Wireless TX TX, Wireless
LAN IEEE LAN IEEE
802.11 b/g 802.11 b/g
Power Printing Average 480 W at 25 °C (77 °F)
consump-
Ready Average 70 W at 25 °C (77 °F)
tion
Sleep Average 8 W at Average 10 W Average 8 W at Average 10 W
25 °C (77 °F) at 25 °C (77 °F) 25 °C (77 °F) at 25 °C (77 °F)
Noise level Sound Printing: 53 dB (A)
Pressure Ready: 30 dB (A)
Sound Monochrome printing: LWAd = 6.34 Bell (A)
power Color printing: LWAd = 6.29 Bell (A)
Ready: LWAd = 3.64 Bell (A)
Temperature Operating: 10 to 32.5 °C (50 to 90.5 °F)
Non operating: 0 to 40 °C (38 to 104 °F)
Storage: -20 to 40 °C (-4 to 104 °F)
Humidity Operating: 20 to 80 % (non condensing)
Storage: 10 to 85 % (non condensing)
Dimensions (W × D × H) 409 x 466 x 250 mm (16.1 x 18.3 x 9.8 inch)
Weight Approximately 19.0 kg (41.9 lb)
including the drum unit, toner cartridge, belt unit and waste toner
box.
*1
The time may change if the machine is performing adjustment of color density or
adjustment of color registration.
1-3 Confidential
<PC Software>
Printer Windows® Host-Based Driver for Windows Host-Based Driver for
driver Server® 2008, Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows Server®
Windows Server® 2003 x64 2008 R2, Windows Server®
Edition, Windows® XP Profes- 2008, Windows Vista®,
sional x64 Edition, Windows Windows Server® 2003 x64
Server® 2003, Windows® XP Edition, Windows® XP
Home Edition/Professional, Professional x64 Edition,
Windows® 2000 Professional Windows Server® 2003,
Windows® XP Home Edition/
Professional
N/A BR-Script 3 N/A BR-Script 3
(PPD file for (PPD file for
Windows Windows® 7,
Server® 2008, Windows
Windows Server® 2008
Vista®, R2, Windows
Windows Server® 2008,
Server® 2003 Windows
x64 Edition, Vista®,
Windows® XP Windows
Professional Server® 2003
x64 Edition, x64 Edition,
Windows Windows® XP
Server® 2003, Professional
Windows® XP x64 Edition,
Home Edition/ Windows
Professional, Server® 2003,
Windows® Windows® XP
2000 Home Edition/
Professional) Professional)
Macin- Macintosh Printer Driver for Mac Macintosh Printer Driver for Mac
tosh® OS® X 10.3.9 or greater OS® X 10.4.11,10.5.x, 10.6.x
N/A BR-Script 3 N/A BR-Script 3
(PPD file for (PPD file for
Mac OS® X Mac OS® X
10.3.9 or 10.4.11,10.5.x,
greater) 10.6.x)
Linux Linux printer driver for CUPS printing system
(x86, x64 environment)
Linux printer driver for LPD/LPRng printing system
(x86, x64 environment)
<Direct Print feature>
Model HL-3040CN/3045CN HL-3070CW/3075CW

Direct N/A PDF version1.7*1, JPEG, Exif+JPEG,
Print PRN (created by own printer driver),
TIFF (scanned by all Brother MFC or
DCP models), PostScript® 3™ (cre-
ated by HL-3070CW BRScript3 printer
driver), XPS version 1.0
*1
The data including JBIG2 image files, JPEG2000 image files and transparency files are not
supported.
1-4 Confidential
<System requirements>
(HL-3040CN/3070CW)
Available
Recom-
Computer Platform & Operating Minimum Hard
Processor Speed mended
System Version RAM Disk
RAM
Space
® ®
Windows® Windows Server® Intel Pentium 4 or 512 MB 2 GB 50 MB
2008 equivalent
® 64-bit (Intel® 64 or
Windows Vista 512 MB 1 GB 50 MB
AMD64)
supported CPU
Windows Server® 64-bit (Intel® 64 or 256 MB 512MB 50 MB
2003 x64 Edition AMD64) supported CPU
Windows® XP
Professional x64
Edition
Windows Server® Intel® Pentium® III or 256 MB 512MB 50 MB
2003 equivalent
Windows® XP Intel® Pentium® II or 128 MB 256 MB 50 MB
Home Edition equivalent
Windows® XP
Professional
Windows® 2000 64 MB 256 MB 50 MB
Professional
Macintosh® Mac OS® X Power PC G4/G5, 512 MB 1 GB 80 MB
10.4.4 or greater Intel® Core™ Processor
Mac OS® X Power PC G4/G5, 128 MB 256 MB
10.3.9 - 10.4.3 Power PC G3 350MHz
1-5 Confidential
(HL-3045CN/3075CW)
Available
Recom-
Computer Platform & Operating Minimum Hard
Processor Speed mended
System Version RAM Disk
RAM
Space
Windows® Windows® 7 Intel® Pentium® 4 or 1GB 1GB 50 MB

equivalent (32-bit) (32-bit)
64-bit (Intel® 64 or 2GB 2GB
AMD64) supported CPU (64-bit) (64-bit)
®
Windows Server® 64-bit (Intel 64 or 512 MB 2 GB 50 MB
2008 R2 AMD64) supported CPU
® ®
Windows Server® Intel Pentium 4 or 512 MB 2 GB 50 MB
2008 equivalent
64-bit (Intel® 64 or
Windows Vista® 512 MB 1 GB 50 MB
AMD64)
supported CPU
Windows Server® 64-bit (Intel® 64 or 256 MB 512MB 50 MB
2003 x64 Edition AMD64) supported CPU
Windows® XP
Professional x64
Edition
Windows Server® Intel® Pentium® III or 256 MB 512MB 50 MB
2003 equivalent
Windows® XP Intel® Pentium® II or 128 MB 256 MB 50 MB
Home Edition equivalent
Windows® XP
Professional
Macintosh® Mac OS® X PowerPC G4/G5 Intel® 512 MB 1 GB 80 MB
10.4.11, 10.5.x Processor
Mac OS® X Intel® Processor 1 GB 2 GB
10.6.x
1-6 Confidential
2.2 Network Connectivity
<Wired network>
Model HL-3040CN/3070CW HL-3045CN/3075CW
Network node type NC-6700h
Operating system Windows Server® 2008, Windows® 7, Windows Server®
support Windows Vista®, Windows 2008 R2, Windows Server®
Server® 2003 x64 Edition, 2008, Windows Vista®, Windows
Windows® XP Professional x64 Server® 2003 x64 Edition,
Edition, Windows Server® 2003, Windows® XP Professional x64
Windows® XP Home Edition/ Edition, Windows Server® 2003,
Professional, Windows® 2000 Windows® XP Home Edition/
Professional, Mac OS® X 10.3.9 Professional, Mac OS® X
or greater 10.4.11,10.5.x, 10.6.x
Protocol TCP/IP: ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP,
support IPv4 APIPA (Auto IP), WINS/NetBIOS APIPA (Auto IP), WINS/NetBIOS
name resolution, DNS resolver, name resolution, DNS resolver,
mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/ mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/
LPD, Custom Raw Port/ LPD, Custom Raw Port/
Port9100, IPP/IPPS, FTP Server, Port9100, IPP/IPPS, FTP Server,
TELNET Server, HTTP/HTTPS TELNET Server, HTTP/HTTPS
server, TFTP client and server, server, TFTP client and server,
SMTP Client, APOP, POP before SMTP Client, APOP, POP before
SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, SNMPv1/ SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, SNMPv1/
v2c/v3, ICMP, LLTD responder, v2c/v3, ICMP, LLTD responder,
Web Services Print, SSL/TLS, Web Services Print, SSL/TLS
CIFS client, SNTP, FTP client
TCP/IP: (Turned off as default) NDP, RA, (Turned off as default) NDP, RA,
IPv6*1 DNS resolver, mDNS, LLMNR DNS resolver, mDNS, LLMNR
responder, LPR/LPD, Custom responder, LPR/LPD, Custom
Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS, Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,
FTP Server, TELNET Server, FTP Server, TELNET Server,
HTTP/HTTPS server, TFTP client HTTP/HTTPS server, TFTP client
and server, SMTP Client, APOP, and server, SMTP Client, APOP,
POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH,
SNMPv1/v2c/v3, ICMPv6, LLTD SNMPv1/v2c/v3, ICMPv6, LLTD
responder, Web Services Print, responder, Web Services Print,
SSL/TLS, CIFS client, SNTP, SSL/TLS
FTP client
Network type Ethernet 10/100 BASE-TX Auto Negotiation
Network printing Windows Server® 2008, Windows® 7, Windows Server®
Windows Vista®, Windows 2008 R2, Windows Server®
Server® 2003 and Windows® XP 2008, Windows Vista®, Windows
TCP/IP printing Server® 2003 and Windows® XP
Mac OS® X 10.3.9 or greater TCP/IP printing
printing Mac OS® X 10.4.11,10.5.x,
10.6.x printing
*1
If you want to use the IPv6 protocol, visit http://solutions.brother.com/ for more information.
1-7 Confidential
Model HL-3040CN/3070CW HL-3045CN/3075CW
Management BRAdmin Windows Server® 2008, Windows® 7, Windows
utility Professional 3 Windows Vista®, Windows
*2
Server® 2008 R2, Windows
Server® 2003 x64 Edition, Server® 2008, Windows
Windows® XP Professional Vista®, Windows Server®
x64 Edition, Windows 2003 x64 Edition, Windows®
Server® 2003, Windows® XP XP Professional x64 Edition,
Home Edition/Professional Windows Server® 2003,
Edition, Windows® 2000 Windows® XP Home Edition/
Professional Professional Edition
Web Windows Server® 2008, Windows® 7, Windows
BRAdmin*2 Windows Vista®, Windows Server® 2008 R2, Windows
Web Based Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (or greater), Firefox 1.0 (or
Management greater) for Windows, and Safari 1.2 (or greater) for
Macintosh are recommended.
BRAdmin Windows Server® 2008, Windows® 7, Windows
Light Windows Vista®, Windows Server® 2008 R2, Windows
Mac OS® X 10.3.9 or greater Mac OS® X 10.4.11,10.5.x,
10.6.x
*2
BRAdmin Professional and Web BRAdmin are available as a download from
http://solutions.brother.com/
1-8 Confidential
<Wireless network>
Model HL-3070CW HL-3075CW

Network node type NC-7500w
Operating system Windows Server® 2008, Windows® 7, Windows Server®
support Windows Vista®, Windows 2008 R2, Windows Server®
Server® 2003 x64 Edition, 2008, Windows Vista®,
Windows® XP Professional x64 Windows Server® 2003 x64
Edition, Windows Server® Edition, Windows® XP
2003, Windows® XP Home Professional x64 Edition,
Edition/Professional, Windows Server® 2003,
Windows® 2000 Professional, Windows® XP Home Edition/
Mac OS® X 10.3.9 or greater Professional, Mac OS® X
10.4.11,10.5.x, 10.6.x
Protocol TCP/IP: ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP), WINS/
support IPv4 NetBIOS name resolution, DNS resolver, mDNS, LLMNR
responder, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS, FTP
Server, TELNET Server, HTTP/HTTPS server, TFTP client and
server, SMTP Client, APOP, POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH,
SNMPv1/v2c/v3, ICMP, LLTD responder, Web Services Print,
SSL/TLS
TCP/IP: NDP, RA, DNS resolver, mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,
IPv6*3 Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS, FTP Server, TELNET
Server, HTTP/HTTPS server, TFTP client and server, SMTP
Client, APOP, POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,
ICMPv6, LLTD responder, Web Services Print, SSL/TLS
Network type IEEE 802.11 b/g wireless
Frequency 2412 - 2472 MHz
RF US/Canada 1 - 11
channels
Japan 802.11 b: 1 - 14, 802.11 g: 1 - 13
Others 1 - 13
Communication mode Infrastructure, Ad-hoc (802.11 b only)
Data rate 802.11 b 11/5.5/2/1 Mbps
802.11 g 54/48/36/24/18/12/11/9/6/5.5/2/1 Mbps
Link distance 70 m (233 ft.) at lowest data rate (The distance rate will vary upon
environment and other equipment location.)
Network security SSID/ESSID, WEP 64/128bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES),
WPA2-PSK (AES), LEAP (CKIP), EAP-FAST (TKIP/AES)
Network printing Windows Server® 2008, Windows® 7, Windows Server®
Windows Vista®, Windows 2008 R2, Windows Server®
Server® 2003 and Windows® 2008, Windows Vista®,
XP TCP/IP printing Windows Server® 2003 and
Mac OS® X 10.3.9 or greater Windows® XP TCP/IP printing
printing Mac OS® X 10.4.11,10.5.x,
10.6.x printing
*3 If you want to use the IPv6 protocol, visit http://solutions.brother.com/ for more information.
1-9 Confidential
Model HL-3070CW HL-3075CW
Management BRAdmin Windows Server® 2008, Windows® 7, Windows
utility Professional 3 Windows Vista®, Windows
*4 Server® 2008 R2, Windows
Web Windows Server® 2008, Windows® 7, Windows
BRAdmin*4 Windows Vista®, Windows Server® 2008 R2, Windows
Web Based Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (or greater),
Management Firefox 1.0 (or greater) for Windows, and
Safari 1.2 (or greater) for Macintosh are recommended.
BRAdmin Windows Server® 2008, Windows® 7, Windows
Light Windows Vista®, Windows Server® 2008 R2, Windows
Mac OS® X 10.3.9 or greater Mac OS® X 10.4.11,10.5.x,
10.6.x
*4
BRAdmin Professional and Web BRAdmin are available as a download from
http://solutions.brother.com/
1-10 Confidential
2.3 Service Information
These are key service information to maintain the product.
- Machine life: approximately 100,000 pages or 5 years
- MTBF (Meantime between failure): 4,000 hours
- MTTR (Meantime to repair): 30 minutes
- Maximum monthly volume: 25,000 pages
- Periodical maintenance parts:
Part Approximate life (page)
Fuser unit 50,000
Paper feeding kit 50,000
* As for replacement of the periodical maintenance parts, refer to “PERIODICAL

MAINTENANCE” in Chapter 4.
1-11 Confidential
2.4 Consumables
Model All models

Toner Life expectancy:
cartridge Black Standard*1: Approximately 2,200 pages/cartridge
Black Starter*2: Approximately 1,000 pages/cartridge
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow Standard*1: Approximately 1,400 pages/cartridge
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow Starter*2: Approximately 1,000 pages/cartridge
* When printing A4/Letter-size paper in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.
Shelf life: 2 years without opening (6 months after opening)
Drum unit Life expectancy: Approximately 15,000*3 pages/drum unit
The life expectancy varies according to the use condition.
* When printing A4/Letter-size paper.
Shelf life: 2 years
Belt unit Life expectancy: Approximately 50,000 pages/belt unit
The life expectancy varies according to the use condition.
Waste toner Life expectancy: Approximately 50,000 pages/waste toner box
box
The shelf life of toner cartridge and drum unit is guaranteed under the normal condition as below;
(Temperature) Normal condition: 0 to 40 °C
* Storage condition at the temperature of 40 to 50 °C: Up to 5 days
* Storage condition at the temperature of -20 to 0 °C: Up to 5 days
(Humidity) Normal condition: 35 to 85 %
* Storage condition at the humidity of 85 to 95 %: Up to 5 days
* Storage condition at the humidity of 10 to 35 %: Up to 5 days
*1
Separately sold consumable toner
*2
Toner supplied with the machine
*3
In the normal use, the color photosensitive drums rotate simultaneously even if no color
print is made at all and black print only is made. Thus, the four color drum units reach the
life expectancy at the same time.
1-12 Confidential
2.5 Paper
2.5.1 Paper handling
Model All models
Paper Input*1 Paper tray 250 sheets

Manual feed slot 1 sheet
Option N/A
Paper Output*1 Face-down 100 sheets
Face-up 1 sheet (Straight paper path)
*2
Duplex Manual duplex Yes
Automatic duplex N/A
*1
Calculated with 80 g/m2 (20 lb) paper
*2
Not supported for Linux driver and PS driver (except Mac PS driver)
2.5.2 Media specifications
Model All models

Media type Paper tray Plain paper, Thin paper, Recycled paper
Manual feed slot Plain paper, Thin paper, Thick paper, Thicker paper,
Recycled paper, Bond paper, Label, Envelopes,
Env. Thin, Env. Thick
Media weight Paper tray 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb)
Manual feed slot 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb)
Media size Paper tray A4, Letter, B5 (ISO), A5, A5 (Long Edge), B6 (ISO),
A6, Executive, Legal*3, Folio
Manual feed slot Width: 76.2 to 220 mm (3.0 to 8.66 inch)
Length: 116 to 406.4 mm (4.57 to 16 inch)
*3
Legal size paper and Folio size paper are not available in some regions outside the USA
and Canada.
1-13 Confidential
2.5.3 Type and size of paper
The printer loads paper from the installed paper tray or the manual feed slot. The names for
the paper trays in the printer driver as follows:
The name for the paper trays The name for the paper trays in the printer driver
Paper tray Tray
Manual feed slot Manual Feed
<Media type>
Choose the media type

Tray Manual Feed
from the printer driver
Plain paper Yes Yes Plain Paper

75 to 105 g/m2
(20 to 28 lb)
Recycled paper Yes Yes Recycled Paper
Bond paper N/A Yes Bond Paper
Rough paper- 60 to 163 g/m2
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb)
(16 to 43 lb)
Thin paper Yes Yes Thin Paper
60 to 75 g/m2
(16 to 20 lb)
Thick paper N/A Yes Thick Paper or
105 to 163 g/m2 Thicker Paper
(28 to 43 lb)
Labels N/A Yes Label
A4 or Letter
Envelopes N/A Yes Envelopes, Env. Thin,
Env. Thick
Memo:
- Use paper that is made for plain-paper copying.
- Use paper that is 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb).
- Use neutral paper. Do not use acidic or alkaline paper.
- Use long-grain paper.
- This printer can use recycled paper that meets DIN 19309 specifications.
- DO NOT use ink jet paper because it may cause a paper jam or damage your printer.
1-14 Confidential
2.6 Printable Area
■ PCL5C emulation
When using PCL5C emulation, the edges of the paper that cannot be printed on are shown
below.
Portrait
F
G
Physical page
Printable area
Logical page
E E
D B
B Physical page length
G G
D Maximum logical page length
F Distance from edge of physical page to
edge of logical page
G
C
Note:
Therefore, the machine can only print within the shaded area when you use a PCL driver.
1-15 Confidential
The table below shows the printable areas when printing on Portrait for each paper size.
Size A B C D E F G
(mm) 215.9 279.4 203.2 279.4 6.35 0 4.23
Letter (inch) 8.5 11 8 11 0.25 0 0.17
(dots) 2,550 3,300 2,400 3,300 75 0 50
(mm) 215.9 355.6 203.2 355.6 6.35 0 4.23
Legal (inch) 8.5 14 8 14 0.25 0 0.17
(dots) 2,550 4,200 2,400 4,200 75 0 50
(mm) 215.9 330.2 203.2 330.2 6.35 0 4.23
Folio (inch) 8.5 13 8 13 0.25 0 0.17
(dots) 2,550 3,900 2,400 3,900 75 0 50
(mm) 184.2 266.7 171.5 266.7 6.35 0 4.23
Executive (inch) 7.25 10.5 6.75 10.5 0.25 0 0.17
(dots) 2,175 3,150 2,025 3,150 75 0 50
(mm) 210 297 198 297 6.01 0 4.23
A4 (inch) 8.3 11.7 7.8 11.7 0.24 0 0.17
(dots) 2,480 3,507 2,338 3,507 71 0 50
(mm) 148 210 136 210 6.01 0 4.23
A5 (inch) 5.8 8.3 5.4 8.3 0.24 0 0.17
(dots) 1,748 2,480 1,606 2,480 71 0 50
(mm) 210 148 198 148 6.01 0 4.23
A5 Long Edge (inch) 8.3 5.8 7.8 5.8 0.24 0 0.17
(dots) 2,480 1,748 2,338 1,748 71 0 50
(mm) 105 148 93 148 6.01 0 4.23
A6 (inch) 4.1 5.8 3.7 5.8 0.24 0 0.17
(dots) 1,240 1,748 1,098 1,748 71 0 50
(mm) 182 257 170 257 6.01 0 4.23
B5 (JIS) (inch) 7.2 10.1 6.7 10.1 0.24 0 0.17
(dots) 2,148 3,030 2,006 3,030 71 0 50
(mm) 176 250 164 250 6.01 0 4.23
B5 (ISO) (inch) 6.9 9.8 6.5 9.8 0.24 0 0.17
(dots) 2,078 2,952 1,936 2,952 71 0 50
(mm) 128 182 116 182 6.01 0 4.23
B6 (JIS) (inch) 5 7.2 4.6 7.2 0.24 0 0.17
(dots) 1,511 2,149 1,369 2,149 71 0 50
(mm) 125 176 113 176 6.01 0 4.23
B6 (ISO) (inch) 4.9 6.9 4.4 6.9 0.24 0 0.17
(dots) 1,476 2,078 1,334 2,078 71 0 50
Envelope (mm) 98.4 190.5 85.7 190.5 6.35 0 4.23
(inch) 3.875 7.5 3.375 7.5 0.25 0 0.17
Monarch (dots) 1,162 2,250 1,012 2,250 75 0 50
Envelope (mm) 104.7 241.3 92 241.3 6.35 0 4.23
(inch) 4.125 9.5 3.625 9.5 0.25 0 0.17
Com-10 (dots) 1,237 2,850 1,087 2,850 75 0 50
(mm) 110 220 98 220 6.01 0 4.23
Envelope DL (inch) 4.3 8.7 3.9 8.7 0.24 0 0.17
(dots) 1,299 2,598 1,157 2,598 71 0 50
(mm) 162 229 150 229 6.01 0 4.23
Envelope C5 (inch) 6.4 9 5.9 9 0.24 0 0.17
(dots) 1,913 2,704 1,771 2,704 71 0 50
(mm) 100 148 88 148 6.01 0 4.23
Hagaki (inch) 3.9 5.8 3.5 5.8 0.24 0 0.17
(dots) 1,181 1,748 1,039 1,748 71 0 50
(mm) 210 405 198 405 6.01 0 4.23
A4 Long (inch) 8.3 15.9 7,8 15.9 0.24 0 0.17
(dots) 2,480 4,783 2,338 4,783 71 0 50
DL Long (mm) 220 110 207 110 6.27 0 6.27
(inch) 8.7 4.3 8.2 4.3 0.25 0 0.25
Edge (dots) 2,598 1,299 2,450 1,299 74 0 74
(mm) 76.2 127 63.5 127 6.35 0 4.23
3X5 (inch) 3 5 2.5 5 0.25 0 0.17
(dots) 900 1,500 750 1,500 75 0 50
Note:
- The paper sizes indicated here should confirm to the nominal dimensions specified by JIS
except B5 (ISO), B6 (ISO).
- The dot size is based on 300 dpi resolution.
1-16 Confidential
Landscape
F
G
Physical page
Printable area
E E Logical page
D B
G G
F Distance from edge of physical
page to edge of logical page
G
F
Note:
- “Logical page” shows the printable area for a PCL driver.
- Therefore, the machine can only print within the shaded area when you use a PCL driver.
1-17 Confidential
The table below shows the printable areas when printing on Landscape for each paper size.
Size A B C D E F G
(mm) 279.4 215.9 269.2 215.9 5.08 0 4.23
Letter (inch) 11 8.5 10.6 8.5 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 3,300 2,550 3,180 2,550 60 0 50
(mm) 355.6 215.9 345.4 215.9 5.08 0 4.23
Legal (inch) 14 8.5 13.6 8.5 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 4,200 2,550 4,080 2,550 60 0 50
(mm) 330.2 215.9 320 215.9 5.08 0 4.23
Folio (inch) 13 8.5 12.6 8.5 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 3,900 2,550 3,780 2,550 60 0 50
(mm) 266.7 184.2 256.5 184.2 5.08 0 4.23
Executive (inch) 10.5 7.25 10.1 7.25 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 3,150 2,175 3,030 2,175 60 0 50
(mm) 297 210 287 210 5 0 4.23
A4 (inch) 11.7 8.3 11.3 8.3 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 3,507 2,480 3,389 2,480 59 0 50
(mm) 210 148 200 148 5 0 4.23
A5 (inch) 8.3 5.8 7.9 5.8 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 2,480 1,748 2,362 1,748 59 0 50
(mm) 148 210 138 210 5 0 4.23
A5 Long Edge (inch) 5.8 8.3 5.4 8.3 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 1,748 2,480 1,630 2,480 59 0 50
(mm) 148 105 138 105 5 0 4.23
A6 (inch) 5.8 4.1 5.4 4.1 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 1,748 1,240 1,630 1,240 59 0 50
(mm) 257 182 247 182 5 0 4.23
B5 (JIS) (inch) 10.1 7.2 9.7 7.2 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 3,030 2,148 2,912 2,148 59 0 50
(mm) 250 176 240 176 5 0 4.23
B5 (ISO) (inch) 9.8 6.9 9.4 6.9 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 2,952 2,078 2,834 2,078 59 0 50
(mm) 182 128 172 128 5 0 4.23
B6 (JIS) (inch) 7.2 5 6.8 5 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 2,149 1,511 2,031 1,511 59 0 50
(mm) 176 125 166 125 5 0 4.23
B6 (ISO) (inch) 6.9 4.9 6.5 4.9 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 2,078 1,476 1,960 1,476 59 0 50
Envelope (mm) 190.5 98.4 180.3 98.4 5.08 0 4.23
(inch) 7.5 3.875 7.1 3.875 0.2 0 0.17
Monarch (dots) 2,250 1,162 2,130 1,162 60 0 50
Envelope (mm) 241.3 104.7 231.1 104.7 5.08 0 4.23
(inch) 9.5 4.125 9.1 4.125 0.2 0 0.17
Com-10 (dots) 2,850 1,237 2,730 1,237 60 0 50
(mm) 220 110 210 110 5 0 4.23
Envelope DL (inch) 8.7 4.3 8.3 4.3 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 2,598 1,299 2,480 1,299 59 0 50
(mm) 229 162 219 162 5 0 4.23
Envelope C5 (inch) 9 6.4 8.6 6.4 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 2,704 1,913 2,586 1,913 59 0 50
(mm) 148 100 138 100 5 0 4.23
Hagaki (inch) 5.8 3.9 5.4 3.9 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 1,748 1,181 1,630 1,181 59 0 50
(mm) 405 210 395 210 5 0 4.23
A4 Long (inch) 15.9 8.3 15.6 8.3 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 4,783 2,480 4,665 2,480 59 0 50
DL Long (mm) 110 220 102 220 4.23 0 6.27
(inch) 4.3 8.7 4 8.7 0.17 0 0.25
Edge (dots) 1,299 2,598 1,199 2,598 50 0 74
(mm) 127 76.2 116.8 76.2 5.08 0 4.23
3X5 (inch) 5 3 4.6 3 0.2 0 0.17
(dots) 1,500 900 1,380 900 60 0 50
Note:
1-18 Confidential
■ PS3/PCL6 (PCLXL) emulation
When using PS3/PCL6 (PCLXL) emulation, the edges of the paper that cannot be printed on
are shown below.
Portrait
Physical page
Printable area
D B

E C
Note:
This is equivalent to the printable area for a PS driver.
1-19 Confidential
The table below shows the printable areas when printing on Portrait for each paper size.
Size A B C D E H
(mm) 215.9 279.4 207.4 270.9 4.23 4.23
Letter (inch) 8.5 11 8.17 10.67 0.17 0.17
(dots) 2,550 3,300 2,450 3,200 50 50
(mm) 215.9 355.6 207.4 347.1 4.23 4.23
Legal (inch) 8.5 14 8.17 13.67 0.17 0.17
(dots) 2,550 4,200 2,450 4,100 50 50
(mm) 215.9 330.2 207.4 321.7 4.23 4.23
Folio (inch) 8.5 13 8.17 12.67 0.17 0.17
(dots) 2,550 3,900 2,450 3,800 50 50
(mm) 184.2 266.7 175.7 258.2 4.23 4.23
Executive (inch) 7.25 10.5 6.92 10.17 0.17 0.17
(dots) 2,175 3,150 2,025 3,050 50 50
(mm) 210 297 202 288 4.23 4.23
A4 (inch) 8.3 11.7 7.9 11.4 0.17 0.17
(dots) 2,480 3,507 2,380 3,407 50 50
(mm) 148 210 140 202 4.23 4.23
A5 (inch) 5.8 8.3 5.5 7.9 0.17 0.17
(dots) 1,748 2,480 1,648 2,380 50 50
(mm) 210 148 202 140 4.23 4.23
A5 Long Edge (inch) 8.3 5.8 7.9 5.5 0.17 0.17
(dots) 2,480 1,748 2,380 1,648 50 50
(mm) 105 148 97 140 4.23 4.23
A6 (inch) 4.1 5.8 3.8 5.5 0.17 0.17
(dots) 1,240 1,748 1,140 1,648 50 50
(mm) 182 257 173 248 4.23 4.23
B5 (JIS) (inch) 7.2 10.1 6.8 9.8 0.17 0.17
(dots) 2,148 3,030 2,048 2,930 50 50
(mm) 176 250 167 241 4.23 4.23
B5 (ISO) (inch) 6.9 9.8 6.6 9.5 0.17 0.17
(dots) 2,078 2,952 1,978 2,852 50 50
(mm) 128 182 119 173 4.23 4.23
B6 (JIS) (inch) 5 7.2 4.7 6.8 0.17 0.17
(dots) 1,511 2,149 1,411 2,049 50 50
(mm) 125 176 117 167 4.23 4.23
B6 (ISO) (inch) 4.9 6.9 4.6 6.6 0.17 0.17
(dots) 1,476 2,078 1,376 1,978 50 50
Envelope (mm) 98.4 190.5 89.9 182 4.23 4.23
(inch) 3.875 7.5 3.54 7.17 0.17 0.17
Monarch (dots) 1,162 2,250 1,062 2,150 50 50
Envelope (mm) 104.7 241.3 96.3 232.8 4.23 4.23
(inch) 4.125 9.5 3.79 9.17 0.17 0.17
Com-10 (dots) 1,237 2,850 1,037 2,750 50 50
(mm) 110 220 102 211 4.23 4.23
Envelope DL (inch) 4.3 8.7 4 8.3 0.17 0.17
(dots) 1,299 2,598 1,199 2,498 50 50
(mm) 162 229 154 220 4.23 4.23
Envelope C5 (inch) 6.4 9 6 8.7 0.17 0.17
(dots) 1,913 2,704 1,813 2,604 50 50
(mm) 100 148 92 140 4.23 4.23
Hagaki (inch) 3.9 5.8 3.6 5.5 0.17 0.17
(dots) 1,181 1,748 1,081 1,648 50 50
(mm) 210 405 202 396 4.23 4.23
A4 Long (inch) 8.3 15.9 7,9 15.9 0.17 0.17
(dots) 2,480 4,783 2,380 4,683 50 50
DL Long (mm) 220 110 207 102 6.27 4.23
(inch) 8.7 4.3 8.2 4 0.25 0.17
Edge (dots) 2,598 1,299 2,450 1,199 74 50
(mm) 76.2 127 67.7 118.5 4.23 4.23
3X5 (inch) 3 5 2.67 4.67 0.17 0.17
(dots) 900 1,500 800 1,400 50 50
Note:
1-20 Confidential
Landscape
Physical page
Printable area
D B

E C
Note:
This is equivalent to the printable area for a PS driver.
1-21 Confidential
The table below shows the printable areas when printing on Landscape for each paper size.
Size A B C D E H
(mm) 279.4 215.9 270.9 207.4 4.23 4.23
Letter (inch) 11 8.5 10.67 8.17 0.17 0.17
(dots) 3,300 2,550 3,200 2,450 50 50
(mm) 355.6 215.9 347.1 207.4 4.23 4.23
Legal (inch) 14 8.5 13.67 8.17 0.17 0.17
(dots) 4,200 2,550 4,100 2,450 50 50
(mm) 330.2 215.9 321.7 207.4 4.23 4.23
Folio (inch) 13 8.5 12.67 8.17 0.17 0.17
(dots) 3,900 2,550 3,800 2,450 50 50
(mm) 266.7 184.2 258.2 175.7 4.23 4.23
Executive (inch) 10.5 7.25 10.17 6.92 0.17 0.17
(dots) 3,150 2,175 3,050 2,075 50 50
(mm) 297 210 288 202 4.23 4.23
A4 (inch) 11.7 8.3 11.4 7.9 0.17 0.17
(dots) 3,507 2,480 3,407 2,380 50 50
(mm) 210 148 202 140 4.23 4.23
A5 (inch) 8.3 5.8 7.9 5.5 0.17 0.17
(dots) 2,480 1,748 2,380 1,648 50 50
(mm) 148 210 140 202 4.23 4.23
A5 Long Edge (inch) 5.8 8.3 5.5 7.9 0.17 0.17
(dots) 1,748 2,480 1,648 2,380 50 50
(mm) 148 105 140 97 4.23 4.23
A6 (inch) 5.8 4.1 5.5 3.8 0.17 0.17
(dots) 1,748 1,240 1,648 1,140 50 50
(mm) 257 182 248 173 4.23 4.23
B5 (JIS) (inch) 10.1 7.2 9.8 6.8 0.17 0.17
(dots) 3,030 2,148 2,930 2,048 50 50
(mm) 250 176 241 167 4.23 4.23
B5 (ISO) (inch) 9.8 6.9 9.5 6.6 0.17 0.17
(dots) 2,952 2,078 2,852 1,978 50 50
(mm) 182 128 173 119 4.23 4.23
B6 (JIS) (inch) 7.2 5 6.8 4.7 0.17 0.17
(dots) 2,149 1,511 2,049 1,411 50 50
(mm) 176 125 167 117 4.23 4.23
B6 (ISO) (inch) 6.9 4.9 6.6 4.6 0.17 0.17
(dots) 2,078 1,476 1,978 1,376 50 50
Envelope (mm) 190.5 98.4 182 89.9 4.23 4.23
(inch) 7.5 3.875 7.17 3.54 0.17 0.17
Monarch (dots) 2,250 1,162 2,150 1,062 50 50
Envelope (mm) 241.3 104.7 232.8 96.3 4.23 4.23
(inch) 9.5 4,125 9.17 3.79 0.17 0.17
Com-10 (dots) 2,850 1,237 2,750 1,137 50 50
(mm) 220 110 211 102 4.23 4.23
Envelope DL (inch) 8.7 4.3 8.3 4 0.17 0.17
(dots) 2,598 1,299 2,498 1,199 50 50
(mm) 229 162 220 154 4.23 4.23
Envelope C5 (inch) 9 6.4 8.7 6 0.17 0.17
(dots) 2,704 1,913 2,604 1,813 50 50
(mm) 148 100 140 92 4.23 4.23
Hagaki (inch) 5.8 3.9 5.5 3.6 0.17 0.17
(dots) 1,748 1,181 1,648 1,081 50 50
(mm) 405 210 396 202 4.23 4.23
A4 Long (inch) 15.9 8.3 15.6 7.9 0.17 0.17
(dots) 4,783 2,480 4,683 2,380 50 50
DL Long (mm) 110 220 102 207 4.23 6.27
(inch) 4.3 8.7 4 8.2 0.17 0.25
Edge (dots) 1,299 2,598 1,199 2,450 50 74
(mm) 127 76.2 118.5 67.7 4.23 4.23
3X5 (inch) 5 3 4.67 2.67 0.17 0.17
(dots) 1,500 900 1,400 800 50 50
Note:
1-22 Confidential
2.7 Print Speeds with Various Settings
Print speed is up to 18 ppm for A4 size and 19 ppm for Letter size when loading A4 or Letter
size paper from the paper tray in the plain paper mode.
Actual print speed varies depending on the media type or paper size as shown in the tables
below:
<A4/Letter size>
Media type setting Print speed
Plain paper, Recycled paper HL-3040CN/3070CW: 16/17 ppm

HL-3045CN/3075CW: 18/19 ppm
Thick paper, Envelope, Envelope thin, Label 8 ppm
Thicker paper, Bond paper, Envelope thick 4 ppm
<Smaller size than A4 or Letter>
Media type setting Print speed
Plain paper, Recycled paper HL-3040CN/3070CW: 17 ppm

HL-3045CN/3075CW: 19 ppm
Thick paper, Envelope, Envelope thin, Label 8 ppm
Thicker paper, Bond paper, Envelope thick 4 ppm
Note:
The actual print speed may vary according to conditions, such as paper size and paper tray.
1-23 Confidential
CHAPTER 2
THEORY OF OPERATION
Confidential
CHAPTER 2
THEORY OF OPERATION
This chapter gives an overview of the printing mechanisms as well as the sensors, actuators and
control electronics. It aids in understanding the basic principles of operation as well as locating defects
for troubleshooting.
CONTENTS
1. GENERAL BLOCK DIAGRAM ..................................................................2-1
2. ELECTRONICS GENERAL BLOCK DIAGRAM........................................2-2
3. MECHANICS ..............................................................................................2-3
3.1 Cross-section Drawing ............................................................................................... 2-3
3.2 Paper Feeding ............................................................................................................ 2-4
3.2.1 Plate-up function of the paper tray .................................................................... 2-5
3.2.2 Paper supply...................................................................................................... 2-6
3.2.3 Paper registration .............................................................................................. 2-7
3.2.4 Paper eject ........................................................................................................ 2-8
3.2.5 Paper supply from manual feed slot and paper eject from back........................ 2-9
3.3 Toner Cartridge ......................................................................................................... 2-10
3.3.1 Type of toner cartridge..................................................................................... 2-10
3.3.2 Life of toner cartridge....................................................................................... 2-10
3.3.3 Method of detecting toner life .......................................................................... 2-11
3.3.4 Relationship between toner amount and life of toner cartridge in number of
rotations of develop roller ................................................................................ 2-11
3.3.5 New toner detection......................................................................................... 2-13
3.3.6 Method of counting the number of toner replacements ................................... 2-15
3.4 Principle of Color Overlapping .................................................................................. 2-16
3.5 Basic Printing Principle ............................................................................................. 2-17
3.5.1 Charging .......................................................................................................... 2-18
3.5.2 Exposure ......................................................................................................... 2-19
3.5.3 Development ................................................................................................... 2-20
3.5.4 Transfer ........................................................................................................... 2-21
3.5.5 Fusing.............................................................................................................. 2-22
3.5.6 Toner cleaning ................................................................................................. 2-23
3.6 Location of Sensors .................................................................................................. 2-24
3.7 Adjustment of Color Registration .............................................................................. 2-28
3.7.1 Color registration error in sub/main scanning direction ................................... 2-28
3.8 Adjustment of Color Density ..................................................................................... 2-28
Confidential
1. GENERAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
Video control system

Interface
Extended RAM (USB Direct) USB device or
DIMM 144pin Digital camera
(Wireless LAN model only)
Internal RAM Interface

(Wired LAN)
External device
Interface
Low-voltage power
(Wireless LAN module)

supply block

Video control block
Interface
(USB)
Operation block
(Panel)
Exposure system Engine control system
LED unit Engine control

block
Image forming system

HVPS control block
HVPS block
Develop unit K Y M C
Develop drive motor
Toner Toner Toner Toner
Developing block Developing block Developing block Developing block Develop release
motor
Drum unit K Y M C
Drum drive motor
Charging block Charging block Charging block Charging block
Exposure drum Exposure drum Exposure drum Exposure drum
Cleaner block Cleaner block Cleaner block Cleaner block
Belt unit
Belt drive motor
Transfer block Transfer block Transfer block Transfer block
Belt
cleaner unit
Belt cleaner block
Paper feed system

Fuser/eject drive
motor
Paper tray Paper feed Fuser unit Paper eject tray
Paper feed motor
Fig. 2-1
2-1 Confidential
2. ELECTRONICS GENERAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
Toner/New sensor PCB Develop drive motor
Drum motor origin sensor PCB Paper feed motor
Belt drive motor

Internal temperature thermistor
Develop release motor
Engine PCB
Fuser/eject drive motor Drum drive motor
Registration solenoid Pick-up solenoid
Density sensor shutter solenoid

High-voltage LV fan
HVPS power
control supply
PCB Main fan
PCB
Toner LED PCB (emission)

(External
Low-voltage power supply PCB THM/HUM Waste toner sensor
sensor)
Eject front sensor PCB Top cover open switch
Develop release sensor PCB

Fuser thermistor 1
LED power relay PCB Registration front/rear sensor PCB
Fuser thermistor 2
Fuser unit Manual sensor PCB
LED head control PCB Main PCB
LED head (K) Belt thermistor *1

Registration
LED head (Y) mark relay Registration mark L PCB
PCB
LED head (M) Registration mark R PCB
LED head (C) Back cover open switch
LCD Panel PCB (Backlight) Wireless LAN PCB (Wireless LAN model only)
Eject rear sensor PCB USB direct interface relay PCB (Wireless LAN model only)
Fig. 2-2
*1
The belt thermistor is not installed depending on the production period due to cost down.
2-2 Confidential
3. MECHANICS
3.1 Cross-section Drawing

Exposure drum (Y) Exposure drum (M) Exit roller 2
Exposure drum (K)
<Front> <Back side>
Exposure drum (C) Pinch roller
Cleaner sponge
Develop roller
Paper eject guide
Supply roller
Back cover
Registration rear actuator

Paper eject
rear actuator
PF registration roller Exit roller 1

Fuser cover
Manual paper actuator Paper eject

front actuator
Registration front
actuator Pressure roller ASSY
Feed roller
Separation roller
Paper tray Cleaner shaft

Plate Belt unit
Separation pad ASSY Heat roller
Paper pick-up roller
Waste toner box
Fig. 2-3
2-3 Confidential
3.2 Paper Feeding
Paper eject function

(Refer to “3.2.4”)
<Front> <Back side>
Manual feed slot path
Manual feed
function
(Refer to “3.2.5”)
Paper pick-up
function
(Refer to “3.2.2”)
Plate-up function Paper tray path
(Refer to “3.2.1”)
Fig. 2-4
2-4 Confidential
3.2.1 Plate-up function of the paper tray
The plate of the paper tray is pushed up by the force exerted by the motor not by springs so as
to keep pressure to the paper pick-up roller and enhance paper-feeding performance
irrespective of the quantity of papers remaining in the tray.
At the time of inserting the paper tray into the main body of the product, the plate is kept
lowered. When the paper feed motor is operated under such condition, a driving force is
transmitted to the lift gear Z36M75 by way of several gears. The force is also transmitted to
the plate-up plate to push up the plate.
Plate
Plate-up plate Lift gear Z36M75
Fig. 2-5
When the plate is pushed up, the lift arm goes down and the hook B is released. The P/P gear
26 sector off the hook B rotates to push down the rib of the hook A. Subsequently, the ratchet
of the hook A for the planetary clutch ASSY deviates from the gear and the plate-up plate
stops its push-up function.
P/P gear 26 sector
Lift arm
Planetary clutch ASSY
Hook B
Plate-up plate
Plate Hook A
Fig. 2-6
The plate returns to the original position when the paper tray is taken out from the main body
of the product, and it repeats the aforementioned operation from the beginning when the paper
tray is inserted into the main body of the product.
2-5 Confidential
3.2.2 Paper supply
When the paper pick-up solenoid is turned ON, the power of the paper feed motor rotates the
paper pick-up roller, and it picks up a few sheets or one sheet of paper from the top of the
sheets in the paper tray every time it is rotated and feeds it to the separation roller.
Subsequently, stacks of paper are caught between the separation roller and separation pad
ASSY, they are then separated into single sheets.
Separation roller Paper pick-up roller
Front face print side
Separation pad ASSY
Paper tray
Fig. 2-7
2-6 Confidential
3.2.3 Paper registration
Passing of each sheet of paper which is separated by the separation roller is detected by the
registration front actuator. Then, the paper is fed further for a certain time, and its front edge
hits the stopped PF registration roller so that the paper skew is corrected. After such
correction, the registration solenoid is turned OFF, the power of the paper feed motor rotates
the PF registration roller, and the paper is fed to the belt unit. The fed paper is fed to the
delivery unit by the belt unit.
Pinch roller Registration rear actuator
Belt unit
PF registration roller
Registration front actuator
Separation roller
Fig. 2-8
<Operation of actuators>
- Registration front actuator detects the passage of paper and the trailing edge of paper.
- Registration rear actuator detects the timing when the leading edge of the paper passes
through the PF registration roller to adjust the starting position for writing on the paper.
- When a paper jam occurs, both actuators will provide information to identify the location
where the jam occurred.
2-7 Confidential
3.2.4 Paper eject
Drive of the fuser/eject drive motor rotates the heat roller and pressure roller of the fuser unit,
and toner on paper is fused as the paper is being fed. Paper moves along the paper eject
guide and is ejected into the output tray from the exit roller 2 with its print side down.
Exit roller 2
Paper eject guide
Paper eject rear actuator

Output tray
Heat roller
Exit roller 1
Paper eject front actuator
Back cover
Pressure roller
Fuser unit
Fig. 2-9
Memo:
When a paper jam is detected near the paper eject front actuator and paper eject rear
actuator, the paper feed motor is revolved in the reverse direction to move the gears out of
engagement. The heat roller become free, allowing any paper jam to be cleared.
<Operation of actuators>
- The paper eject front actuator detects that the paper passes through the heat roller to detect
that the paper does not wind around the heat roller.
- The paper eject rear actuator detects that the paper passes through the fuser unit to detect
that a paper jam does not occur between the heat roller and exit roller 1.
2-8 Confidential
3.2.5 Paper supply from manual feed slot and paper eject from back
When making print from the manual feed slot, set papers on it with the print side up. A sheet of
paper which is inserted from the manual feed slot one by one presses the manual paper
actuator, and consequently the actuator detects that there is a sheet of paper. When the
manual paper actuator is turned ON, pick-up from the manual feed slot is given priority. Power
of the paper feed motor rotates the PF registration roller, and a sheet of paper is picked up.
When making print while the back cover is open, a printed sheet is ejected from the back with
its print side up.
Registration rear actuator
Manual feed slot
Back cover

Manual paper actuator PF registration roller
Fig. 2-10
2-9 Confidential
3.3 Toner Cartridge
3.3.1 Type of toner cartridge
This product has four types of toner cartridges, K (black), Y (yellow), M (magenta), and C (cyan),
and each toner cartridge has starter toner cartridge and standard toner cartridge. The toner
cartridges supplied with the product are starter toner cartridges, and the toner cartridges which
are sold as consumable parts are standard toner cartridges. There is a difference in the capacity
and inner shape between K and Y/M/C. In addition, the location to install each cartridge is fixed
depending on the colors.
3.3.2 Life of toner cartridge

In the following two cases, this product considers that the toner cartridge reaches its life end
and stops printing thereafter.
- When the remaining toner powder becomes insufficient for printing
- When the number of accumulated rotations of the develop roller reaches a specified value,
and it is considered that the roller cannot maintain sufficient performance
(1) Number of printable pages by a single toner cartridge
When making prints in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798, the number of printable pages by
a single toner cartridge is shown in the table below:
Toner cartridge Number of printable pages
Starter Black 1,000 pages
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan 1,000 pages
Standard Black 2,200 pages
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan 1,400 pages
(2) Upper limit of number of rotations of develop roller

The upper limit of the number of rotations of the develop roller is shown in the table below:
Toner cartridge Upper limit of rotations of the develop roller
Starter Black 26,880 rotations
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan 26,880 rotations
Standard Black 57,600 rotations
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan 38,400 rotations
The graph given in the next page shows the overview of change in the number of printable
pages in the case of making prints on A4-size paper.
Memo:
- The number of rotation of the developer roller per page is as follows.
Color Monochrome
Number of developer roller rotations for the first page 38.4 rotations 35.1 rotations
printed
Number of developer roller rotations for the second page 14.6 rotations 14.5 rotations
and after (in the case of continuous printing)
- Number of idling rotation when the printer is turned ON=110.4 rotations

- Number of rotations upon warm-up operation=11.0 rotations
- Number of rotations upon color registration adjustment=42.7 rotations
- Number of rotations upon color density adjustment=56.7 rotations
Note:
The numeral values provided in this page are as of July 2009. These values are subject to
change without prior notice.
2-10 Confidential
3.3.3 Method of detecting toner life
This product detects the life of the toner cartridges using the following two means.
■ Detection by the toner sensor

This product has a function to detect the remaining toner by checking the level at which toner
in a cartridge interrupts light using a transmissive light sensor.
■ Detection by means of rotation rates of the develop roller reached its upper limit
This product has a function to stop the operation even if toner remains when the number of
rotation reaches the upper limit before the develop roller is worn out and becomes unusable.
When toner reaches its life, this product notifies the users about it by displaying a message to
that effect on the LCD. There are two messages to indicate toner reaches its life: “Toner Low”
and “Replace Toner.” While “Toner Low” is displayed on the LCD when the toner sensor
detects a certain amount of toner is used, “Replace Toner” is displayed on the LCD when the
toner sensor detects that usable toner in a toner cartridge is used up or when the number of
rotations of the develop roller reaches its life.
When “Replace Toner” is displayed on the LCD, no print can be made on this machine until the
toner cartridge in question is replaced with a new one.
3.3.4 Relationship between toner amount and life of toner cartridge in number
of rotations of develop roller
The number of printable pages by a single toner cartridge and upper limit of the number of
rotations of the develop roller are provided in the tables in the previous page. When printing
low-duty documents, however, there is a possibility that the number of rotations of the develop
roller reaches the upper limit, and “Replace Toner” is displayed before toner runs out.
■ Relationship between printable pages of the toner cartridge and remaining toner
Full
Normal-duty
(ISO/IEC19798) Low-duty
High-duty
Low Cartridge Life End
Empty
pages
Toner Empty Toner Empty
Memo:
When the number of rotations of the develop roller reaches the upper limit, “Replace Toner”
is displayed even if toner remains.
2-11 Confidential
<Life of toner cartridge>
The life of the toner cartridge varies according to the average number of print pages per job.
(See the table below.) The number of printable pages is larger when making continuous prints
in one job because deterioration of the develop roller is low.
Relationship between average print page per 1 job and life of toner cartridges
Average print page (page/job) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Cartridge life (Standard-K) 1,500 2,174 2,556 2,803 2,975 3,102 3,200 3,277
Cartridge life (Standard-YMC) 1,000 1,449 1,704 1,869 1,983 2,068 2,133 2,185
Cartridge life (Starter-KYMC) 700 1,014 1,193 1,308 1,388 1,448 1,493 1,529
The develop roller also rotates for the warm-up operation, color registration adjustment
operation, and developing bias adjustment operation when the power is turned ON and when
the cover is opened or closed. Therefore, when these operations are frequently performed,
the life of toner cartridges is shortened. (The table below shows the worst case in which the
warm-up operation, color registration adjustment, and developing bias adjustment are
performed when the power is turned ON.)
Life of the toner cartridges in the case that the power is turned OFF/ON for every print job, and
color registration adjustment and developing bias adjustment are performed
Average print page (page/job) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Cartridge life (Standard-K) 232 438 623 789 939 1,076 1,201 1,315
Cartridge life (Standard-YMC) 155 292 415 526 626 717 800 877
Cartridge life (Starter-KYMC) 108 205 291 368 438 502 560 614
Memo:
- This product prohibits the print operation while any of the toner cartridges is not mounted
or when “Replace Toner” is displayed. In other words, neither monochrome printing
without a color toner cartridge nor color printing without a black toner cartridge is
available.
- This product does not have a function to identify colors of the color toner cartridges.
Note:
The numeral values provided in this page are as of July 2009. These values are subject to
change without prior notice.
2-12 Confidential
3.3.5 New toner detection
When a toner cartridge is replaced and a new toner cartridge is mounted, there is a need to
reset the develop bias voltage value (refer to next page) to the initial value and to reset
prohibition of the print operation by clearing the display of "Toner Low" or "Replace Toner."
The old and new toner cartridges can be identified using the new toner detection mechanism
shown below.
■ New toner detection mechanism
When a new toner cartridge is mounted and the develop drive motor starts rotating, rotation is
conveyed to the reset gear via some other gears. Consequently, the rib on the reset gear
presses the reset upper lever, it turns ON the new toner sensor, and it is detected that a new
toner cartridge is mounted. If the develop drive motor further rotates, the rib on the reset gear
is disengaged from the reset upper lever, and the new toner sensor is turned OFF.
<For Standard toner cartridge>
Drive of the develop drive motor rotates the reset gear, and the rib on the reset gear presses
the reset upper lever. Consequently, the new toner sensor turns ON, and it is detected that a
new toner cartridge is mounted.
Reset gear Rib
Rib
Gear
Standard toner cartridge
Reset gear Rib
Reset gear
New toner sensor
Reset upper lever Rib

New toner sensor
Reset upper lever

Side frame L
Side frame L
Fig. 2-11
<For Starter toner cartridge>
It is assumed that the starter toner cartridge is mounted when the main unit is turned ON for
the first time after the product is shipped out. The reset gear is not mounted.
2-13 Confidential
■ Developing bias voltage
Toner in use tends to have a low print density at the beginning of its use, but the density
gradually becomes higher after a certain period of use if the bias voltage is kept at a certain
level during development.
The properties of the toner is controlled by means of the developing bias voltage. The values
are varied according to counts of the amount of toner used immediately after a toner cartridge
is changed so that excellent print quality of even contrast can be obtained constantly from the
printing start time to the stop time.
In addition, the developing bias voltage of each toner cartridge is periodically corrected so as
to eliminate variation in the density of the four colors.
When the new toner detection mechanism detects the change to a new toner cartridge, the
developing bias voltage is reset.
[Density] Actual control

[Voltage]
Print density
Developing bias voltage
[Used toner amount]
Fig. 2-12
Note:
If a toner cartridge in use is replaced to a cartridge which has previously been in use before
reaching a toner life, the developing bias voltage will become incorrect and the density will
be changed, and consequently it may cause print failures. Toner cartridges being used
must not be replaced with other ones.
2-14 Confidential
3.3.6 Method of counting the number of toner replacements
This machine keeps the number of times that the toner cartridges are replaced and the page
counters to learn the usage of the machine. These counters will not be deleted even if the
power is turned OFF. The following tables explain the method of counting the counter values
when the toner cartridges are replaced.
<When a brand-new toner cartridge (unused) is inserted after “Replace Toner” is

displayed>
Corresponding counter, Setting value Operation
Counter of toner cartridge changes +1
Page counter for each toner cartridge Reset (0)
Coverage for each toner cartridge Reset (0)
Developing bias voltage Reset (Initial setting)
<When a toner cartridge which is not brand-new is inserted after “Replace

Toner” is displayed by toner sensor detection*1>
Corresponding counter, Setting value Operation
Counter of toner cartridge changes No count up
Page counter for each toner cartridge Continued
Coverage for each toner cartridge Continued
Developing bias voltage Reset (Initial setting)*2
*1 Excluding a toner cartridge in use in which there is a little toner remained.

*2 The developing bias voltage is reset to the initial setting once when a toner cartridge which
is not brand-new is inserted. After resetting, the developing bias voltage correction is
performed so that the developing bias voltage is corrected according to the amount of
toner.
Note:
While the parameters explained above are separately controlled for 4 color toners, the
same counting method is applied.
2-15 Confidential
3.4 Principle of Color Overlapping
The human eye distinguishes one color from others by receiving light’s three primary colors
(Red, Green, Blue). When monochrome lights are received, each color can be sensed.
However, when two-color lights, red (R) and green (G), are received, they are recognized as
“yellow”; when three-color lights, red (R), green (G) and blue (B), are received, they are
recognized as “white”. The fineness of coloration is perceived according to the nature of light.
Red
Yellow Magenta
White
Green Blue
Cyan
Fig. 2-13
For printed colors, the human eye can perceive them as various colors by distinguishing each
color light reflected off the surface of a sheet of paper.
(1) Green+Blue
“Cyan” absorbs red (R) light only
among the three-color lights and G
reflects green (G) and blue (B) lights, B
and consequently the light is identified B G R
as “Cyan.” Reflected Reflected Absorbed
Cyan toner
(2) Red+Blue
“Magenta” absorbs green (G) light only R
among the three-color lights and
reflects red (R) and blue (B) lights, and B
consequently the light is identified as B G R
“Magenta.” Reflected Absorbed Reflected
Magenta toner
(3) Blue
If cyan and magenta are mixed, cyan
absorbs red (R) light and magenta
absorbs green (G) light, and only blue B
(B) light is reflected. The light is B G R
identified as “blue.” Reflected Absorbed Absorbed
Cyan toner + Magenta toner
Fig. 2-14
Theoretically, if cyan, magenta and yellow are mixed, all the colors are not reflected and black
can be shown. However, a black mix is difficult to produce, and black is shown using
blackcolor paint for practical purposes. Using such a principle, color-absorbing paints are
mixed to allow many colors to be shown on the surface of a sheet of paper.
2-16 Confidential
3.5 Basic Printing Principle
The printing process consists broadly of 6 processes: Charging, Exposure, Development,

Transfer, Fusing and Cleaning.
<Printing process>
(1) Charging: The surface of the drum is electrically charged (Primary Charge).
(2) Exposure: A printed image is formed on the surface of the drum by applying LED beam
(Electrostatic Latent Image).
(3) Development: Toner is adhered to the surface of the drum (Visible Image).
(4) Transfer: The toner on the surface of the exposure drum is transferred to the paper.
(5) Fusing: The transferred toner is fused on to the paper.
(6) Cleaning: Toner remaining on the exposure drum and belt unit is removed for recovery.
After these processes, the image is printed on the paper.
Charging Exposure Development Transfer
K Y M C
Fusing
Cleaning
Fig. 2-15
2-17 Confidential
3.5.1 Charging
The exposure drum needs to be evenly electrified to coat toner beautifully on the exposure
drum. Ions are produced by supplying high-voltage power to the corona wire. The flow of the
ion charge is controlled by the constant voltage of the grid approximately 700 V and electrified
the exposure drum surface evenly.
Corona wire
Ion
Exposure drum
Grid
Fig. 2-16
2-18 Confidential
3.5.2 Exposure
Exposure is conducted by LED (Light Emitting Diode) arrays.
Four LED arrays for K, Y, M and C are mounted as an LED ASSY on the top cover unit of the
main unit. These four LED arrays do not emit different colors corresponding to toner colors,
and they are the same parts in terms of structure.
LED ASSY
LED array
Fig. 2-17
On the PCB in the LED array, 4,992 LEDs, which correspond to the total number of the dots of
the 600-dpi print head, are arranged in a staggered pattern. The lens array forms image on
the exposure drum using the light emitted from the LEDs. The surface potential on the
exposure drum, which is evenly charged, is lowered by exposure, and consequently image is
formed.
Memo:
- The focus adjustment of the distance between the LED ASSY and exposure drum is
made by the lower rollers at the both ends of the LED ASSY, and a fixed distance is
maintained.
- Maximum print width is 207.44 mm = 4,900 dots.
LED ASSY
LED array
Lens array
LED array
Roller Roller
Exposure drum
* Figure of the side view * Figure of the front view

Exposure drum
Fig. 2-18
2-19 Confidential
3.5.3 Development
Toner is attracted to the latent-image area on the exposure drum where surface potential is
lowered due to exposure.
By controlling the developing bias voltage supplied to the develop roller, the amount of toner
taken to the exposure drum is adjusted to keep printing density constant.
400 V
(Changes depending on use condition)
LED beam
Toner 700 V
150 V
Charging
Develop roller
Exposure drum
Fig. 2-19
<Flow up of toner to the development process>

(1) Toner adheres to the charged develop roller.
(2) The thickness of the adhered toner is evened out by the blade.
(3) The toner adhered to the develop roller is attracted to the exposed areas of the exposure
drum.
Blade
Develop roller
Exposure drum
Fig. 2-20
2-20 Confidential
3.5.4 Transfer
By applying a minus charge to the transfer roller of the belt unit, the toner adhered to the
exposure drum is transferred to paper which is traveling on the feed belt.
Exposure drum (K) Exposure drum (Y) Exposure drum (M) Exposure drum (C)
Belt unit
Feed belt
Transfer roller
Fig. 2-21
Memo:
The four colors of toner are coated in turn on the paper to form a color:
First comes K, then Y, then M, and then C.
Toner
Paper
Fig. 2-22
2-21 Confidential
3.5.5 Fusing
The toner transferred on to the paper passes between the heat roller and the pressure roller in
the fuser unit and are fused by heat and pressure. The main CPU detects surface
temperature of the heat roller using the thermistor and turns ON/OFF the halogen heater lamp
to keep the temperature constant.
Thermistor
Thermistor
Heat roller
Halogen heater lamp
Pressure roller
Fuser unit
Fig. 2-23
Memo:
Control of fusing temperature
The fuser unit adjusts such temperature according to types and sizes of paper so as to
keep excellent image quality.
2-22 Confidential
3.5.6 Toner cleaning
<Flow of toner cleaning>
(1) Toner remaining on the exposure drum which has not completely been transferred on to
the paper is pulled onto the drum cleaner with a lower potential and the drum is cleaned.
(2) After the above step, the potential of the drum cleaner is raised during printing, and such
attracted toner is returned to the exposure drum again. The returned toner is attracted to
the belt unit by lowering the potential of the transfer roller.
(3) The toner attracted to the belt unit is collected by the belt cleaner below the unit, and
stored in the waste toner box.
Memo:
When the toner returns to the exposure drum from the drum cleaner, the develop roller is
separated from the exposure drum to prevent color mixture.
Develop roller
Drum cleaner
Exposure drum
Drum cleaner Paper
Belt
Exposure
drum Drum
Develop roller cleaner
Belt cleaner
Paper
Belt Belt Transfer roller

Back-up
roller
Cleaning shaft
Cleaning
roller
Waste toner box
Fig. 2-24
2-23 Confidential
3.6 Location of Sensors
Name of sensor Type Position Function

Paper eject rear Photosensor On the eject rear sensor The paper eject rear
sensor PCB ASSY in the paper actuator detects that
eject guide ASSY the paper passes
through the fuser unit
to check that no paper
jam occurs between
the heat roller and exit
roller 1.
Manual sensor Photosensor On the manual sensor Detects if paper is
PCB ASSY in the front loaded on the manual
chute ASSY feed slot.
Top cover open switch Mechanical On the side frame R Detects open and
switch close of the top cover.
Back cover sensor Mechanical On the side frame L Detects open and
switch close of the Back
cover.
Paper eject front Photosensor On the eject front sensor The paper eject front
sensor (Fuser cover) PCB ASSY in the side actuator detects that
frame L the paper passes
through the heat roller
to check that no paper
winds around the heat
roller.
Registration front Photosensor On the registration front/ Detects if paper from
sensor rear sensor PCB ASSY the paper tray is
in the paper feed unit passing through and
detects the trailing
edge position of paper.
Registration rear Photosensor On the registration front/ Adjusts the write start
sensor rear sensor PCB ASSY position on paper.
in the paper feed unit
New toner sensor Photosensor On the toner/new sensor Detects if a new toner
PCB ASSY in the side is mounted.
frame L
Toner LED LED On the toner LED PCB Detects if plenty toner
(Light emission) ASSY in the side frame R remains.
Toner sensor Photosensor On the toner/new sensor
(Light reception) PCB ASSY in the side
frame L
Waste toner sensor Photosensor On the waste toner Detects if waste toner
sensor holder in the waste toner box
is almost full.
External temperature/ Thermistor On the HVPS control Detects ambient
humidity sensor PCB ASSY in the side temperature and
frame R humidity.
Internal temperature Thermistor On the drum motor Detects temperature
sensor origin sensor PCB ASSY in the product (L side).
in the side frame L
2-24 Confidential
Name of sensor Type Position Function
Belt thermistor *1 Thermistor Registration sensor Detects temperature

holder ASSY in the product (at the
center).
Drum motor origin Photosensor On the drum motor Detects the phase of
sensor origin sensor PCB ASSY the drum motor.
in the side frame L
Fuser/eject drive Photosensor On the fuser/eject drive Detects if the fuser/

motor sensor motor sensor PCB eject drive motor
ASSY in the eject gear operates properly.
cover
Registration mark Photosensor On the registration mark Measures color

sensor L L PCB ASSY in the displacement (L side).
registration sensor
holder ASSY
Registration mark Photosensor On the registration mark Measures color

sensor R R PCB ASSY in the displacement (R side).
registration sensor
holder ASSY
Density sensor Photosensor On the registration mark Measures the density

L PCB ASSY in the of each color.
registration sensor
holder ASSY
Develop release Photosensor On the develop release Detects the distance

sensor sensor PCB ASSY in the between the develop
side frame R roller and exposure
drum.
Fuser side thermistor Thermistor In the fuser unit Detects the

temperature of the
heat roller.
Fuser center Thermistor In the fuser unit Detects the

thermistor temperature of the
heat roller.
*1
2-25 Confidential
■ Location of sensors
Belt thermistor *1
Registration sensor holder ASSY
Registration mark sensor L
Density sensor Registration mark sensor R
Eject gear cover

Waste toner
sensor holder Registration rear sensor
Fuser/eject
drive motor
sensor
Registration front sensor
Registration front/rear
sensor PCB ASSY
Manual sensor
Paper feed unit Waste toner sensor

<Front>
Fig. 2-25

Paper eject rear sensor
Toner LED
(Light emission)
Internal temperature sensor
Back cover sensor

Top cover open
switch
Paper eject front
sensor (Fuser cover)
Develop release
sensor
Drum motor
origin sensor
External temperature/
humidity sensor
Toner sensor
(Light reception)
New toner sensor

<Front>
Fig. 2-26
*1 The belt thermistor is not installed depending on the production period due to cost down.
2-26 Confidential
Fuser center thermistor
Fuser side thermistor
Fuser unit
<Front>
Fig. 2-27
2-27 Confidential
3.7 Adjustment of Color Registration
In this device, the drum and develop unit are prepared for K, Y, M, and C respectively. Four
color images are combined into one image, and therefore color registration error might occur.
Auto color registration error correction control is to calculate the color registration error amount
and adjust the exposure timing as a means to prevent color registration error.
■ Execution timing
- When the continuous print elapsed time reaches a designated time, or when the elapsed
time of intermittence print or ready state reaches a designated time.
- Execution from the operation panel (Function code 66), etc.
- Immediately after the top cover is opened and closed.
- After the power is turned OFF and ON. (When the specified period of time has passed since
the previous execution.)
3.7.1 Color registration error in sub/main scanning direction

The color registration test patterns are printed on the belt unit, and the registration mark
sensor reads them. The registration mark sensor is a reflective sensor, and the reflection rate
is different between the surface of the belt unit and toner. The sensor reads the test patterns
using the difference of the reflection rate when the test patterns pass through the sensor. The
displacement in the sub/main scanning direction is calculated based on the distance between
the patterns read by the registration mark sensor, and it is corrected.
3.8 Adjustment of Color Density
To obtain stable print quality, the density of each toner needs to be maintained at a fixed value.
If the density balance between the colors cannot be kept, the tint becomes unstable, and
accurate color reproduction becomes unavailable. The toner density is changed due to the
charged amount of toner, deterioration of the develop unit, and temperature and humidity in
the level device. Control to keep the stable print density is made by changing the develop bias
voltage.
■ Execution timing
- Execution is made at a designated timing (specified in WSW55; the default is 24 hours).
(Execution is made when print is started after a specified time has passed.)
- Execution from the operation panel (Function code 83), etc.
- Execution is made when toner is replaced with a new one.
- Execution is made when the ambient temperature is changed.
■ Operation
The density level adjustment test patterns are printed on the belt unit, and the density sensor
reads them. The read density of each color and the density reference value are compared,
and if any difference is found, the develop bias voltage is controlled to match the print density
to the reference value.
2-28 Confidential
CHAPTER 3
ERROR INDICATION AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
Confidential
CHAPTER 3
ERROR INDICATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter details error messages and codes which the incorporated self-diagnostic function of the
machine will display if any error or malfunction occurs. If any error message appears, refer to this
chapter to find which parts should be checked or replaced.
The latter half of this chapter provides sample problems which could occur in the main sections of the
machine and related troubleshooting procedures.
CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................3-1
1.1 Precautions................................................................................................................. 3-1
1.2 Components ............................................................................................................... 3-2
1.3 Initial Check ................................................................................................................ 3-3
2. ERROR INDICATIONS...............................................................................3-5
2.1 Error Codes ................................................................................................................ 3-5
2.2 Error Messages .......................................................................................................... 3-8
2.3 Error Cause and Remedy ......................................................................................... 3-10
3. PAPER FEEDING PROBLEMS ...............................................................3-51

3.1 No Feeding ............................................................................................................... 3-51
3.2 Double Feeding ........................................................................................................ 3-52
3.3 Paper Jam ................................................................................................................ 3-52
3.4 Dirt on Paper ............................................................................................................ 3-54
3.5 Wrinkles on Paper .................................................................................................... 3-54
3.6 Curl of Paper ............................................................................................................ 3-55
4. IMAGE DEFECT TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................3-56

4.1 Image Defect Examples ........................................................................................... 3-56
4.2 Pitch Indicated in Roller Image ................................................................................. 3-57
4.3 Troubleshooting Image Defect.................................................................................. 3-57
5. SOFTWARE SETTING PROBLEMS........................................................3-81

5.1 Cannot Print Data ..................................................................................................... 3-81
6. NETWORK PROBLEMS ..........................................................................3-82

6.1 Cannot Make a Print through Network Connection .................................................. 3-82
7. OTHERS PROBLEMS .............................................................................3-83

7.1 The Machine is Not Turned ON, or The LCD Indication Does Not Appear............... 3-83
7.2 The Fan Does Not Work. .......................................................................................... 3-84
Confidential
1. INTRODUCTION
Troubleshooting is the countermeasure procedures that the service personnel should follow if
an error or malfunction occurs with the machine. It is impossible to anticipate all of the
possible troubles which may occur in future and determine the troubleshooting procedures, so
this chapter covers some sample troubles. However, those samples will help the service
personnel pinpoint and repair other defective elements.
1.1 Precautions
Be sure to observe and follow all the precautions to prevent any secondary problems from
happening during troubleshooting.
(1) Always turn off the power and unplug the power cable before removing any covers or
PCBs, adjusting the machine and so on. If you need to take voltage measurements with
the power switched on, take the greatest of care not to receive an electric shock.
(2) When connecting or disconnecting cable connectors, make sure that you hold the
connector body and not the cables.
(3) Static electricity charged in your body may damage electronic parts.
Before handling the PCBs, touch a metal portion of the machine to discharge static
electricity charged in your body. When transporting PCBs, be sure to wrap them in
conductive sheets.
When replacing the LED ASSY/PCBs, put on a grounding wrist band and perform the job
on a static mat. Also take care not to touch the conductor sections on the flat cables.
(4) Follow the warning by all means.
WARNING
The fuser unit becomes extremely hot during operation. Wait until it has cooled down
sufficiently before replacing consumable items. DO NOT remove or damage the
caution label located on or around the fuser.
WARNING
contains alcohol or ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the machine. Doing this
may cause a fire or electrical shock.
(5) Verify again that the repaired portion works properly.
3-1 Confidential
1.2 Components
Top cover sub ASSY
Top cover arm R
LED head control

LED ASSY PCB ASSY
Top cover arm L
Fuser cover
Fuser unit
Back cover
Side cover R ASSY
LVPS unit
Main fan ASSY
Registration sensor
holder ASSY
LV fan ASSY
Fuser eject drive Toner LED

ASSY PCB ASSY
High-voltage power
Side frame L supply PCB ASSY
Belt drive unit HVPS control
PCB ASSY
Side frame R
Main PCB ASSY Waste toner sensor
holder ASSY
Paper feed
unit
Toner/New sensor
PCB ASSY
Control panel
cover ASSY
USB direct interface

Side cover L ASSY relay PCB ASSY
Access cover Drum develop

drive unit
Front cover ASSY

Engine PCB ASSY
Paper tray
Fig. 3-1
3-2 Confidential
1.3 Initial Check
Check the following items before attempting to repair the machine.
■ Operating environment
(1) Put your machine on a flat, stable surface such as a desk that is free of vibration and
shocks.
(2) Use the machine in a well-ventilated room; use the machine within the following ranges of
temperature and humidity: temperature between 10 °C and 32.5 °C (50 °F to 90.5 °F),
and the relative humidity is maintained between 20 % and 80 %.
(3) Ensure the machine is not exposed to direct sunlight, excessive heat, moisture, or dust.
(4) Keep the machine horizontal when you carry it. To prevent injuries when moving or lifting
this machine, make sure to use at least two people.
Fig. 3-2
■ Power supply
(1) The AC input power supply described on the rating plate of the machine should be within
±10 % of the rated voltage.
(2) The AC input power supply is within the regulated value.
(3) The cables and harnesses are connected correctly.
(4) The fuses are not blown.
■ Paper
(1) A recommended type of paper is being used. (Refer to “2.5 Paper” in Chapter 1.)
(2) The paper is not damp.
(3) The paper is not short-grained paper or acid paper.
■ Consumable parts
(1) The drum unit (including the toner cartridge) is installed correctly.
(2) The belt unit and waste toner box are installed correctly.
3-3 Confidential
■ Others
(1) Condensation
When the machine is moved from a cold place into a warm room, condensation may
occur inside the machine, causing various problems as listed below.
- Condensation on the optical surfaces such as the LED array may cause the print image
to be light.
- If the exposure drum is cold, the electrical resistance of the photosensitive layer is
increased, making it impossible to obtain the correct contrast when printing.
- Condensation on the charge unit may cause corona charge leakage.
- Condensation on the plate and separation pad may cause paper feed problems.
If condensation has occurred, leave the machine for at least two hours to allow it to reach
room temperature.
If the drum unit is unpacked soon after it is moved from a cold place to a warm room,
condensation may occur inside the unit which may cause incorrect images. Instruct the
user to allow the unit to come to room temperature before unpacking it. This will take one
or two hours.
(2) Low temperature
The motor may not drive normally under the low temperature environment. This is due to
there being too much load to drive each unit. In this case, the “Low Temperature/Increase
room temperature to allow the machine to operate” message will appear on the LCD.
Increase the room temperature when the above message is indicated.
■ Cleaning
Use a soft dry lint-free cloth.
WARNING
contains alcohol or ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the machine. Doing this may
cause a fire or electrical shock.
3-4 Confidential
2. ERROR INDICATIONS
This machine includes a self-diagnosis function. If the machine does not work normally it
judges that an error has occurred, and indicates the corresponding error message on the LCD,
which in turn helps the service men to quickly find out the problem.
2.1 Error Codes

Error Refer Error Refer
codes
Problem to: codes
Problem to:
10 Color registration adjustment failure 3-10 23 LED ASSY error (C) 3-14
(Error, which cannot be recorded, 24 Internal temperature sensor error 3-14
occurs.)
25 Develop drive motor error 3-15
26 Belt drive motor error 3-15
11 Color registration adjustment failure 3-10 28 Drum drive motor error 3-15
(Toner of the color which being used 29 Belt cleaner drive motor error 3-15
reached the end of life.)
2A Develop release motor error 3-15
2C Toner/New sensor PCB error (K) 3-16
2D Toner/New sensor PCB error (Y) 3-16
12 Color registration adjustment failure 3-10 2E Toner/New sensor PCB error (M) 3-16
(Incorrect measurement value of 2F Toner/New sensor PCB error (C) 3-16
color registration adjustment.)
31 Density sensor error 3-17
32 Density sensor shutter performance 3-17
malfunction
13 Developing bias correction failure 3-11 33 Right color registration sensor error 3-18
(Error, which cannot be recorded, occurs.) 34 Left color registration sensor error 3-18
14 Developing bias correction failure 3-11 36 HVPS PCB error in ready state 3-19
(Toner life end) 37 Belt thermistor error *1
3-19
15 Developing bias correction failure 3-11 38 External temperature sensor error 3-20
(Incorrect measurement value of 39 External humidity sensor error 3-20
developing bias correction)
3A Engine PCB transfer error 3-20
16 Color registration adjustment failure 3-12 3B Main PCB RAM error 3-21
(Error, which cannot be recorded, occurs.) 3E NVRAM transfer error 3-21
17 Color registration adjustment failure 3-12 40 HVPS PCB error in operating 3-19
(Toner life end) 42 HVPS control PCB transfer error 3-21
18 Color registration adjustment failure 3-12 43 Main/Engine ASIC transfer error 3-22
(Incorrect measurement value of 44 No toner cartridge (K) 3-22
color registration adjustment)
45 No toner cartridge (Y) 3-22
1A Dew condensation on high-voltage 3-13 46 No toner cartridge (M) 3-22
power supply PCB 47 No toner cartridge (C) 3-22
1B Drum error (C) 3-13 48 Drum life end (K) 3-23
1C Drum error (M) 3-13 49 Drum life end (Y) 3-23
1D Drum error (Y) 3-13 4A Drum life end (M) 3-23
20 LED ASSY error (K) 3-14 4B Drum life end (C) 3-23
21 LED ASSY error (Y) 3-14 4C Drum life end soon (K) 3-23
22 LED ASSY error (M) 3-14 4D Drum life end soon (Y) 3-23
*1
An error of the belt thermistor might not be the cause depending on the version of the main firmware.
For details, refer to P3-19.
3-5 Confidential
codes
Problem to: codes
Problem to:
4E Drum life end soon (M) 3-23 73 Recording ASIC read/write error 3-30
4F Drum life end soon (C) 3-23 74 Toner of the color which is being used 3-30
reaches the end of life while printing.
52 Paper feeding kit life end 3-23
54 Fuser unit life end 3-24 75 Machine cooling down inside 3-31
56 Fuser cover opened 3-24 76 Fuser unit error 3-25
(The center thermistor detects rapid
58 Fuser unit error 3-25
(Some kind of temperature error of temperature rising.)
the fuser unit occurs.)
59 Fuser unit error 3-25 78 Fuser unit error 3-26
(Re-detection of fuser unit failure (The center thermistor detects rapid
upon startup after the error code 58 temperature falling.)
occurs.)
5B Short paper 3-26 7D Dirt on drum unit 3-31
5C Small paper 3-26 81 Incorrect density sensor measurement 3-34
value when implementing adjustment
5D Belt unit life end soon 3-26
of color density from the control panel
5E Belt unit life end 3-27 cover ASSY.
5F Waste toner box near full 3-27 82 Density patch measurement is not 3-34
completed normally when
60 Toner life end (C) 3-28
implementing adjustment of color
61 Toner life end (M) 3-28 density from the control panel cover
ASSY.
62 Toner life end (Y) 3-28
63 Toner life end (K) 3-28 83 Drum error (K) 3-13
64 Toner life end soon (C) 3-29 84 Paper jam at the back of the machine 3-35
inside
65 Toner life end soon (M) 3-29
66 Toner life end soon (Y) 3-29 87 Toner of the color which is being 3-30
used reaches the end of life when
67 Toner life end soon (K) 3-29
6A Fuser unit error 3-25 density from the control panel cover
(The center thermistor does not ASSY
detect 60 °C within the specified
time.) 88 Paper jam inside the machine 3-35
6B Fuser unit error 3-25 8A Paper jam in paper tray 3-36
(The center thermistor does not
8D Eject front sensor sticking at ON 3-36
detect 100 °C within the specified
upon startup
time.)
6C Fuser unit error 3-25 8E Error in the adjustment of color 3-37
(The center thermistor detects higher registration result when implementing it
temperature than the specified from the control panel cover ASSY.
value.)
6D Fuser unit error 3-25 8F Detection of abnormal value of 3-37
(The center thermistor detects lower registration sensor sensitivity when
temperature than the specified value.) implementing adjustment of color
registration from the control panel
cover ASSY
6F Fuser unit error 3-25
(The center or side thermistors
91 Size mismatch 3-37
detect extremely high temperature.)
94 No paper in paper tray 3-38
70 Fuser/Eject drive motor error 3-29 96 No paper in all trays 3-39
3-6 Confidential
codes Problem to: codes Problem to:
97 Not supported paper 3-39 CF Waste toner box full 3-45

9A No paper in manual feed slot 3-39 DE Thermistor of fuser unit misconnected 3-45
9D Detection of incorrect registration 3-37 E0 Program error 3-45
sensor measurement value when
E1 Program error 3-46
registration from the control panel E2 Temperature error of heat roller 3-46
cover ASSY E3 Drum motor origin sensor failure 3-46
9E Toner of the color which is being 3-30 E6 Write error in EEPROM 3-21
used reaches the end of life when E9 Maintenance monitor error 3-46
registration from the control panel EC Main fan error 3-47
cover ASSY. ED Communication with the wireless 3-47
LAN PCB cannot be established
9F No paper while printing 3-40
upon startup of the power supply
A1 Top cover opened 3-40 EE Unavailability of communication after 3-47
connecting to the wireless LAN PCB
C0 Identification failure for a new toner 3-41
cartridge (K) is detected
C1 Identification failure for a new toner 3-41 EF Low-voltage power supply PCB failure 3-48
cartridge (Y) F2 Waste toner box near full 3-48
C2 Identification failure for a new toner 3-41 F4 Waste toner box life end 3-48
cartridge (M) F9 Power turned OFF while the function 3-49
code 74 is being executed and
C3 Identification failure for a new toner 3-41
“PARAMETER INT” is being displayed
cartridge (C)
C6 Pressure engagement/disengagement 3-42 FA No drum unit (K) 3-49

failure of toner cartridge FB No drum unit (C) 3-49
C7 Insufficient memory 3-42 FC No drum unit (M) 3-49
C8 RAM area for secure data full 3-42 FD No drum unit (Y) 3-49
C9 DIMM error 3-43 FE Detection of incorrect measurement 3-50
CA Excess current to USB device 3-43 value of density sensor sensitivity
calibration
CB No belt unit 3-44
CE No waste toner box 3-44 FF Overcurrent error of wireless LAN PCB 3-50
3-7 Confidential
2.2 Error Messages
The error messages displayed on the LCD of the product and their description and measure
are shown in the table below.
Error message Description/ Measure Refer to:
Access Error The USB device was removed while data was 3-43
(Wireless LAN model processing. Press Cancel button. Reinsert the USB
only) device and try to print with Direct Print or PictBridge.
Belt End Soon The belt unit is near the end of its life. Buy a new belt 3-26
unit before you get a “Replace Belt” message.
Calibrate - Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds and turn it on 3-30
Scroll message: again. 3-34
Calibration failed. - Put in a new drum unit. 3-50
See - Put in a new belt unit.
Troubleshooting - Put in a new waste toner box.
chapter in User's
guide.
Cartridge Error Take out the drum unit and toner cartridge assembly for 3-41
the toner color that is indicated on the LCD. Remove the
toner cartridge and then re-install it in the drum. Put the
drum unit and toner cartridge assembly back into the
printer again.
Cover is Open Close the cover that is indicated on the LCD. 3-24
3-36
3-40
DIMM Error Turn off the printer. Re-install the DIMM correctly. Wait a 3-43
few seconds and turn it on again. If this error message
appears again, replace the DIMM with a new one.
Drum End Soon The drum unit is near the end of its life. Buy a new drum 3-23
(X) * or Drums End unit that is indicated on the LCD before you get a
Soon “Replace Drum” message.
Drum Error Clean the corona wires. If the LCD still shows the same 3-13
error message after you have cleaned the corona wire, 3-31
replace the drum unit with a new one that is indicated on
the LCD.
Fuser Error Turn off the power switch, wait a few seconds and then 3-25
turn it on again. Leave the printer for 15 minutes with the 3-45
power on.
Jam XXX Carefully pull out the jammed paper from the area shown 3-35
in the message. 3-36
3-52
Low Temperature Increase room temperature to allow the printer to operate. ---
Manual Feed Put the same size of paper in the manual feed slot as is shown 3-39
on the LCD. If the printer is “paused”, press Go button.
No Belt Unit Install the belt unit. 3-44
No Paper Put paper in the indicated empty tray. If the problem is 3-39
not solved, the paper pick-up roller may be stained. 3-40
Clean the paper pick-up roller.
No Toner Install the toner cartridge that is indicated on the LCD. 3-49
Install the drum unit that is indicated on the LCD.
* (X) at the end of the message shows the color of the toner cartridge or drum unit.
(X) must be either K (Black), Y (Yellow), M (Magenta) or C (Cyan).
3-8 Confidential
Error message Type of error Refer to:
No Waste Toner Install the waste toner box. 3-44

Out of Memory If the LCD shows this error message when you print the 3-42
secure data, press Cancel button and delete the
previously stored data. Except in the case of printing
secure data and add more memory.
Print Unable ## Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds and turn it on 3-13
again. I
3-47
Registration - Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds and turn it on 3-30
Scroll message: again. 3-37
Registration failed. - Put in a new belt unit.
See
Troubleshooting
chapter in User's
guide.
Replace Belt It is time to replace the belt unit. Replace the belt unit. 3-27
Replace Drum (X) * It is time to replace the drum unit. Replace the drum unit 3-23
or Replace Drums that is indicated on the LCD.
Replace Toner It is time to replace the toner cartridge. Replace the 3-28
toner cartridge that is indicated on the LCD.
Replace WT Box It is time to replace the waste toner box. Replace the 3-45
waste toner box. 3-48
Replace Fuser It is time to replace the fuser unit. Replace the fuser unit. 3-24
Replace PF Kit1 It is time to replace the paper feeding kit. Replace the 3-23
paper feeding kit.
Short paper Open the back cover (back-output tray) to let the printed 3-26
paper out on the back-output tray and then press Go
button.
Size Mismatch Put the same size paper in the paper tray or manual feed 3-37
slot that is selected in the printer driver, and then press
Go button or select the size of paper which you set in the
paper tray size setting from the control panel cover ASSY.
Small paper Open the back cover (back-output tray) to let the printed 3-26
paper out on the back-output tray and then press Go button.
Toner Error Dismount the drum unit of the color displayed on the LCD 3-42
or all the drum units, and then take out the toner cartridge
from the drum unit(s). Put the toner cartridge back to the
drum unit(s), and remount the drum unit(s) to the printer.
Toner Low (X) * The toner cartridge is nearly empty. Buy a new toner 3-29
cartridge that is indicated on the LCD before you get a
“Replace Toner” message.
Unusable Device Remove the USB flash memory drive from the USB 3-43
(Wireless LAN model Direct Interface. 3-50
only)
WT Box End Soon The waste toner box will need replacement soon. Buy a 3-27
new waste toner box before you get a “Replace WT Box”
message.
* (X) at the end of the message shows the color of the toner cartridge or drum unit.
(X) must be either K (Black), Y (Yellow), M (Magenta) or C (Cyan).
3-9 Confidential
2.3 Error Cause and Remedy
Check the User Check items first. If an error cannot be resolved, follow the procedures in
numerical order in the Step field.
■ Error code 10
-
Color registration adjustment failure (Error, which cannot be recorded, occurs.)
Step Cause Remedy

1 Main PCB failure Replace the main PCB ASSY.
■ Error code 11
TONER EMPTY #
* Any of K, Y, M, or C, which refer to colors, is indicated in #.
Color registration adjustment failure
(Toner of the color which being used reached the end of life.)
<User Check>
- Replace the toner cartridge of the color displayed on the LCD.
Step Cause Remedy

■ Error code 12
FAILED
Color registration adjustment failure
(Incorrect measurement value of color registration adjustment.)
<User Check>
- Replace the belt unit with a new one.
- Replace the waste toner box with a new one.
Step Cause Remedy

1 Registration mark L/R PCB Replace the registration sensor holder
ASSY failure ASSY.
3-10 Confidential
■ Error code 13
-
An error, which cannot be recorded, occurs while correction of developing bias is performed.
<User Check>
Step Cause Remedy

1 Registration mark L PCB ASSY Replace the registration sensor holder
failure ASSY.
2 HVPS control PCB failure Replace the HVPS control PCB ASSY.
3 High-voltage power supply PCB Replace the high-voltage power supply
failure PCB ASSY.
■ Error code 14
-
Toner reaches its life end while correction of developing bias is performed.
This error is not recorded in the error log.
<User Check>
- Replace the cartridge of toner which reaches its life end with a new one.
Step Cause Remedy

■ Error code 15
-
Correction of developing bias fails.
<User Check>
Step Cause Remedy

failure ASSY.
failure PCB ASSY.
3-11 Confidential
■ Error code 16
-
An error, which cannot be recorded, occurs while auto color registration is performed.
<User Check>
Step Cause Remedy

failure ASSY.
■ Error code 17
-
Toner reaches its life end while auto color registration is performed.
This error is not recorded in the error log.
<User Check>
- Replace the cartridge of toner which reaches its life end with a new one.
Step Cause Remedy
■ Error code 18
-
Auto color registration fails.
<User Check>
Step Cause Remedy

failure ASSY.

failure PCB ASSY.
3-12 Confidential
■ Error code 1A
Print Unable 1A
Turn the power switch off and open the Top Cover. Wait 30 minutes, and then
turn it on again.
Dew condensation might have occurred in the machine. (The temperature/humidity sensor on
the high voltage control PCB detects sudden environmental change.) / High-voltage power
supply PCB error/ Drum unit error
<User Check>
- Power off and open the top cover. Wait 30 minutes, and then turn it ON again after closing
the top cover.
- Clean the corona wire in the drum unit.
- Replace the drum unit with a new one.
Step Cause Remedy

1 Dirt on drum unit Clean the electrodes of the drum unit and
electrodes main body. (Refer to Fig. 3-3 (P3-32) and
Fig. 3-6 (P3-33))
failure PCB ASSY.
■ Error code 1B
Drum Error
Replace the Drum Unit. Cyan (C). Refer to the User's Guide.
Error code 1C
Drum Error
Replace the Drum Unit. Magenta (M). Refer to the User's Guide.
Error code 1D
Drum Error
Replace the Drum Unit. Yellow (Y). Refer to the User's Guide.
Error code 83
Drum Error
Replace the Drum Unit. Black (K). Refer to the User's Guide.
Drum error
* After the error code 48, 49, 4A, or 4B (the drum unit is at the end of life) occurs, and when
the counter value exceeds twice the life expectancy and electric discharge occurs due to
smear on the corona wire, and disturbance is detected in the charge current of the
high-voltage power supply PCB, the error code 83, 1B, 1C, or 1D appears. When the error
code 83, 1B, 1C, or 1D appears, the performance of the drum unit cannot be maintained,
and the print quality is deteriorated, and therefore the use of the drum is stopped.
<User Check>
- Replace the drum unit of the appropriate color with a new one.
- After replacing the drum unit with a new one, reset the counter using the control panel cover
ASSY on the machine. (Refer to “2.3 Parts Life Reset Function” in Chapter 7.)
3-13 Confidential
■ Error code 20 (K), 21 (Y), 22 (M), 23 (C)
Print Unable 20
Turn the power off and then back on again.
Print Unable 21
Print Unable 22
Print Unable 23
LED ASSY error (EEPROM access error of the LED head)
Step Cause Remedy
1 FFC connection failure of each Check the FFC connection of the

LED ASSY appropriate color and reconnect it.
2 LED head control PCB failure Replace the LED head control PCB ASSY.
3 Failure of each LED ASSY Replace the LED ASSY of the appropriate
color.
5 Low-voltage power supply PCB Replace the low-voltage power supply

failure PCB ASSY.
■ Error code 24
Print Unable 24
Internal temperature sensor error
Step Cause Remedy
1 Internal temperature sensor Replace the drum motor origin sensor

failure PCB ASSY.
2 Engine PCB failure Replace the engine PCB ASSY.
3-14 Confidential
■ Error code 25
Print Unable 25
Develop drive motor error (Incorrect synchronized signal of the develop drive motor)
Error code 26
Print Unable 26
Belt drive motor error
Error code 28
Print Unable 28
Drum drive motor error (Incorrect synchronized signal of the drum drive motor)
Error code 29
Print Unable 29
Belt cleaner drive motor error (Incorrect synchronized signal of the belt cleaner drive motor)
Step Cause Remedy
1 Harness connection failure of Check the harness connection of the

motor appropriate motor and reconnect it.
2 Motor failure Replace the appropriate motor.
failure PCB ASSY.
■ Error code 2A
Print Unable 2A
Develop release motor error
Step Cause Remedy

develop release motor develop release motor and reconnect it.
2 Develop release motor failure Replace the develop release motor ASSY.
3-15 Confidential
■ Error code 2C (K), 2D (Y), 2E (M), 2F (C)
Print Unable 2C
Print Unable 2D
Print Unable 2E
Print Unable 2F
Toner/New sensor PCB error (The toner sensor is ON while the toner LED sensor is not ON.)
Step Cause Remedy
1 Toner/new sensor PCB failure Check the sensor performance following

the procedure described in “Function code
32”. If any problem occurs, replace the
toner/new sensor PCB ASSY.
3-16 Confidential
■ Error code 31
Print Unable 31
Density sensor error (Incorrect measurement value of the density sensor)
Error code 32
Print Unable 32
Density sensor shutter performance malfunction
<User Check>
- Check if there is a scratch, dirt or the like on the belt unit. If there is, replace the belt unit
with a new one.
Step Cause Remedy
1 Harness connection failure of Check the harness connection between

registration mark L PCB ASSY the registration mark L PCB ASSY and
registration mark relay PCB ASSY, and
the one between the registration mark
relay PCB ASSY and engine PCB ASSY.
Then, reconnect them.
density sensor shutter solenoid density sensor shutter solenoid and
reconnect it.
3 Registration mark L PCB failure Replace the registration sensor holder
ASSY.
3-17 Confidential
■ Error code 33
Print Unable 33
Right color registration sensor error
(Incorrect reading value of the color registration sensor (Right))
Error code 34
Print Unable 34
Left color registration sensor error
(Incorrect reading value of the color registration sensor (Left))
<User Check>
with a new one.
Step Cause Remedy

registration mark PCB ASSY registration mark PCB ASSY and
reconnect it.
2 Registration mark PCB failure Check the performance of the registration

mark sensor following the procedure
described in “Function code 75”.
If any problem occurs, replace the
registration sensor holder ASSY.
3-18 Confidential
■ Error code 36
Print Unable 36
Error occurs while the high-voltage power supply PCB is in ready state.
Error code 40
Print Unable 40
Error occurs while the high-voltage power supply PCB is in operation
* After the error code 36 is displayed for 5 seconds, the power of the main unit is forcibly
turned off, and it takes 10 minutes to recover.
<User Check>
Step Cause Remedy

1 Dirt on drum unit Clean the electrodes of the drum unit and
electrodes main body. (Refer to Fig. 3-3 (P3-32) and
Fig. 3-6 (P3-33))
high-voltage power supply PCB the high-voltage power supply PCB ASSY
ASSY and engine PCB ASSY, and the one
between the high-voltage power supply
PCB ASSY and main PCB ASSY. Then,
reconnect them.
failure PCB ASSY.
■ Error code 37
Print Unable 37
Belt thermistor error *1
Step Cause Remedy

1 Harness connection failure of Check the harness connection of the belt
belt thermistor ASSY thermistor ASSY.
*1
If this error occurs on the machine of which the version of the main firmware is after the
version shown in the table below, the conceivable causes are noise around the installation
site, fluctuation of the power supply voltage, and failures in the software.
Model Main firmware version

HL-3040CN/3070CW Ver.1.19 and after
3-19 Confidential
■ Error code 38
Print Unable 38
External temperature sensor error
Error code 39
Print Unable 39
External humidity sensor error
Step Cause Remedy
■ Error code 3A
Print Unable 3A
Engine PCB transfer error (disconnection)
Step Cause Remedy

engine PCB ASSY the main PCB ASSY and engine PCB
ASSY, and reconnect it.
3-20 Confidential
■ Error code 3B
Print Unable 3B
Main PCB RAM error (DIMM access error)
Error code 3E
Print Unable 3E
NVRAM transfer error
Error code E6
Print Unable E6
Write error in EEPROM
Step Cause Remedy
■ Error code 42
Print Unable 42
HVPS control PCB transfer error
Step Cause Remedy

high-voltage power supply PCB the high-voltage power supply PCB ASSY
ASSY and HVPS control PCB ASSY, and
reconnect it.

HVPS control PCB ASSY the HVPS control PCB ASSY and main
PCB ASSY, and reconnect it.

failure PCB ASSY.
3-21 Confidential
■ Error code 43
Print Unable 43
Main/Engine ASIC transfer error
Step Cause Remedy
1 Harness connection failure Check the harness connection between

between the main PCB ASSY the main PCB ASSY and engine PCB
and engine PCB ASSY ASSY, and reconnect it.
■ Error code 44 (K), 45 (Y), 46 (M), 47 (C)
No Toner
Open the Top Cover, then install Toner Cartridge. Black (K)
No Toner
Open the Top Cover, then install Toner Cartridge. Yellow (Y)
No Toner
Open the Top Cover, then install Toner Cartridge. Magenta (M)
No Toner
Open the Top Cover, then install Toner Cartridge. Cyan (C)
Toner cartridge is not installed into the machine.
(Non-installation is detected by the toner sensor.)
<User Check>
- Install the toner cartridge of the appropriate color.
Step Cause Remedy

toner/new sensor PCB ASSY toner/new sensor PCB ASSY and
reconnect it.
4 Toner/new sensor PCB failure Replace the toner/new sensor PCB ASSY.
3-22 Confidential
■ Error code 48 (K), 49 (Y), 4A (M), 4B (C)
Replace Drum (K)
Replace Drum (Y)
Replace Drum (M)
Replace Drum (C)

Drum unit is at the end of life. (The drum counter value reaches the end of life.)
* When all four colors reach the end of life at the same time.
Replace Drums
<User Check>
- After replacing the drum unit, reset the counter using the control panel cover ASSY on the machine.
(Refer to “2.3 Parts Life Reset Function” in Chapter 7.)
■ Error code 4C (K), 4D (Y), 4E (M), 4F (C)
Drum End Soon (K)
Drum End Soon (Y)
Drum End Soon (M)
Drum End Soon (C)

The drum unit will reach the end of life soon. (The drum counter value reaches 90 % of life.)
* When all four colors reach 90 % of the life at the same time.
Drums End Soon
<User Check>
- Prepare a new drum unit of the appropriate color.
■ Error code 52
Replace PF Kit1
Paper feeding kit is at the end of life.
(The counter value of the paper feeding kit reaches the end of life.)
Step Cause Remedy
1 Paper feeding kit worn out Replace the paper feeding kit.
3-23 Confidential
■ Error code 54
Replace Fuser
Fuse unit is at the end of life. (The counter value of the fuser unit reaches the end of life.)
Step Cause Remedy
1 Fuser unit is at the end of life. Replace the fuser unit.
■ Error code 56
Cover is Open
Close the Fuser Cover which can be found behind the Back Cover of the
machine.
Fuser cover opened (Eject front sensor sticking at ON)
<User Check>
- Check if the fuser cover is closed correctly.
Step Cause Remedy
1 Paper eject front actuator Correct catching of the paper eject front
catching on some position actuator.
2 Eject front sensor PCB failure Replace the eject front sensor PCB ASSY.
3-24 Confidential
■ Error code 58
Fuser Error
Turn the power off, then on again. Leave the machine for 15 min.
Fuser unit error (Some kind of temperature error of the fuser unit occurs.)
Error code 59
Self-Diagnostic
Will Automatically Restart within 15 minutes.
Fuser unit error (Re-detection of fuser unit failure upon startup after the error code 58 occurs.)
* If the same error is detected again 15 minutes later, the message below is indicated.
Error code 6A
Print Unable 6A
Fuser unit error (The center thermistor does not detect 60 °C within the specified time.)
Error code 6B
Print Unable 6B
Fuser unit error (The center thermistor does not detect 100 °C within the specified time.)
Error code 6C
Print Unable 6C
Fuser unit error (The center thermistor detects higher temperature than the specified value.)
Error code 6D
Print Unable 6D
Fuser unit error (The center thermistor detects lower temperature than the specified value.)
Error code 6F
Print Unable 6F
Fuser unit error (The center or side thermistors detect extremely high temperature.)
Error code 76
Print Unable 76
Fuser unit error (The center thermistor detects rapid temperature rising.)
Refer to the next page for remedy.
3-25 Confidential
Error code 78
Print Unable 78
Fuser unit error (The center thermistor detects rapid temperature falling.)
Step Cause Remedy

between fuser unit connector and the fuser unit connector and eject front
eject front sensor PCB ASSY sensor PCB ASSY, and reconnect it.

between eject front sensor PCB the eject front sensor PCB ASSY and
ASSY and main PCB ASSY main PCB ASSY, and reconnect it.
3 Fuser unit failure Replace the fuser unit.

failure PCB ASSY.
■ Error code 5B
Short paper
Open the Back Cover and then press Go.
Paper of which size is not supported is used. (Paper of less than 148 mm length is fed.)
<User Check>
- Open the back cover and remove the paper.
■ Error code 5C
Small paper
Open the Back Cover and then press Go.
Paper of which size is not supported is used.
(Paper of less than 148 mm length is specified from a computer.)
<User Check>
- Open the back cover and make print, or change the paper specified from a computer to
larger-size paper.
■ Error code 5D
Belt End Soon

The belt unit will reach the end of life soon. (The belt unit counter value reaches 90 % of life.)
<User Check>
- Prepare a new belt unit.
3-26 Confidential
■ Error code 5E
Replace Belt
The belt unit is at the end of life. (The belt unit counter value reaches the end of life.)
<User Check>
- After replacing the belt unit, reset the counter using the control panel cover ASSY on the machine.
■ Error code 5F
WT Box End Soon

The waste toner box near full. (The waste toner sensor detects the always ON state.)
Note:
The same message appears in the case of the error code F2.
<User Check>
- Prepare a new waste toner box.
Step Cause Remedy

waste toner sensor waste toner sensor and reconnect it.
2 Waste toner sensor failure Check the sensor performance following

waste toner sensor.
3-27 Confidential
■ Error code 60 (C), 61 (M), 62 (Y), 63 (K)
Replace Toner
Open the Top Cover, replace Toner Cartridge. Cyan (C).
Replace Toner
Open the Top Cover, replace Toner Cartridge. Magenta (M).
Replace Toner
Open the Top Cover, replace Toner Cartridge. Yellow (Y).
Replace Toner
Open the Top Cover, replace Toner Cartridge. Black (K).
Toner cartridge is at the end of life. (The counter value of the develop roller reaches the end of
life, or the toner sensor detects toner empty.)
<User Check>
- Gently shake the toner cartridge of the appropriate color from side to side and install it again.
- Replace the toner cartridge of the appropriate color.
Step Cause Remedy
4 Harness connection failure of Check the sensor performance following

toner/new sensor PCB ASSY the procedure described in “Function code
32”.
If any problem occurs, check the harness
connection of the toner/new sensor PCB
ASSY of the appropriate color, then
reconnect it.
3-28 Confidential
■ Error code 64 (C), 65 (M), 66 (Y), 67 (K)
Toner Low (#)

* Any of K, Y, M, or C, which refer to colors, is indicated in #.
Toner cartridge will reach the end of life soon. (The counter value of the develop roller reaches
90 % of life, or the toner sensor detects toner near empty.)
<User Check>
- Gently shake the toner cartridge of the appropriate color from side to side and install it again.
- Replace the toner cartridge of the appropriate color.
Step Cause Remedy
4 Harness connection failure of Check the sensor performance following

toner/new sensor PCB ASSY the procedure described in “Function code
32”.
If any problem occurs, check the harness
connection of the toner/new sensor PCB
ASSY, then reconnect it.
■ Error code 70
Print Unable 70
Fuser/Eject drive motor error
Step Cause Remedy

fuser/eject drive motor fuser/eject drive motor and reconnect it.

fuser/eject drive motor sensor fuser/eject drive motor sensor PCB ASSY
PCB ASSY and reconnect it.
3 Fuser/eject drive motor failure Replace the fuser/eject drive motor.
4 Fuser/eject drive motor sensor Replace the fuser/eject drive motor sensor
PCB ASSY failure PCB ASSY.
3-29 Confidential
■ Error code 73
Print Unable 73
Recording ASIC read/write error
Step Cause Remedy

LED head control PCB ASSY the main PCB ASSY and LED head
control PCB ASSY, and reconnect them.
2 LED head control PCB failure Replace the LED head control PCB ASSY.
■ Error code 74 (This error can be found out only in “Function code 82”.)
Replace Toner
Toner of the color which is being used reaches the end of life while printing.
(The counter value of the develop roller reaches the end of life, or the toner sensor detects
toner empty.) This error is not recorded in the error log.
Error code 87
Calibrate
Calibration failed. Insufficient Toner for Calibration.
Toner of the color which is being used reaches the end of life when implementing adjustment
of color density from the control panel cover ASSY. (The counter value of the develop roller
reaches the end of life, or the toner sensor detects toner empty.)
Error code 9E
Registration
Registration failed. Insufficient Toner for Registration.
Toner of the color which is being used reaches the end of life when implementing adjustment
of color registration from the control panel cover ASSY. (The counter value of the develop
roller reaches the end of life, or the toner sensor detects toner empty.)
<User Check>
- If any of the toner cartridges reaches the end of life, replace it with a new one.
Step Cause Remedy
1 Toner/new sensor PCB failure Check the sensor performance following

toner/new sensor PCB ASSY.
3-30 Confidential
■ Error code 75
Cooling Down
Wait for a while
Cooling down the inside of the machine to protect it.
The machine indicates “Cooling Down” in one of the conditions below.

- The temperature inside the machine is high.
- Both ends of the heat roller are heated extraordinarily.
- The paper media is replaced.
■ Error code 7D
Drum Error
Slide the Green tab on Drum Unit. Black (K)/ Yellow (Y)/ Magenta (M)/ Cyan (C).
Refer to the User's Guide.
Dirt on drum unit (Detection of discharge of the corona wire)
<User Check>
Step Cause Remedy
1 Dirt or dust on drum unit Clean the electrodes of the drum unit, belt
electrodes unit and main body.
(Refer to Fig. 3-3, Fig-3-4 (next page) and
Fig. 3-6 (P3-33))

failure PCB ASSY.
3-31 Confidential
■ Electrodes location of the drum unit and toner cartridge
* Black only
Fig. 3-3
■ Electrodes location of the belt unit
Fig. 3-4
3-32 Confidential
■ Electrodes location of waste toner box
Fig. 3-5
■ Electrodes location of main body
Fig. 3-6
<How to clean the electrodes>
Turn off the power switch. Unplug the machine from the AC power outlet, and leave the
machine for a few minutes. Then, wipe the electrodes above carefully with a dry lint-free cloth.
Be careful not to change the shapes of the electrodes.
3-33 Confidential
■ Error code 81
Calibrate
Calibration failed. See Troubleshooting chapter in User’s Guide.
Incorrect density sensor measurement value when implementing adjustment of color density
from the control panel cover ASSY.
Error code 82
Calibrate
Calibration failed. Press Go, and try again.
Density patch measurement is not completed normally when implementing adjustment of color
density from the control panel cover ASSY.
<User Check>
with a new one.
- Check if the genuine toner cartridges are installed in the correct order of colors.
Step Cause Remedy
1 Density sensor shutter catching Correct catching of the density sensor

on some position shutter.

registration mark L PCB ASSY registration mark L PCB ASSY and
reconnect it.

ASSY.
3-34 Confidential
■ Error code 84
Jam Rear
Open the Back Cover and remove the jammed paper, then press Go.
Paper jam at the back of the machine inside
(The eject front sensor sticks at ON after the registration rear actuator is turned OFF.)
Error code 88
Jam Inside
Open the Top Cover, pull out all 4 Drum Units completely and remove the
jammed paper.
Paper jam inside the machine
(The registration rear actuator sticks at ON, or the eject front sensor fails to be turned ON.)
<User Check>
- Check if the paper is jammed. If jammed, remove it.
Step Cause Remedy
1 Harness connection failure of Check the harness connections of the

registration front/rear sensor registration front/rear sensor PCB ASSY
PCB ASSY and eject front and eject front sensor PCB ASSY, and
sensor PCB ASSY reconnect them.
2 Registration rear actuator or Correct catching of the registration rear

paper eject front actuator actuator or paper eject front actuator.
catching on some position
3 Eject front sensor PCB failure Check the sensor performance following
(Error code 84) the procedure described in “Function code
eject front sensor PCB ASSY.
Registration front/rear sensor Check the sensor performance following

PCB failure the procedure described in “Function code
(Error code 88) 32”. If any problem occurs, replace the
registration front/rear sensor PCB ASSY.
3-35 Confidential
■ Error code 8A
Jam Tray 1
Remove the jammed paper from Tray 1, then press Go.
Paper jam in the paper tray (The registration front sensor sticks at ON.)
<User Check>
- Check if the paper is jammed in the paper tray. If jammed, remove it.
- Adjust the paper guide corresponding to the paper size.
- Check if too much paper is loaded in the tray.
Step Cause Remedy

2 Paper feeding kit worn out Replace the paper feeding kit.
3 Registration front/rear sensor Check the sensor performance following

PCB failure the procedure described in “Function code
32”.
■ Error code 8D
Cover is Open
Make sure there is no paper jammed inside the machine and close the Back
Cover, then press Go.
Eject front sensor sticking at ON upon startup
<User Check>
- Close the fuser cover.
Step Cause Remedy

eject front sensor PCB ASSY eject front sensor PCB ASSY and
reconnect it.
3-36 Confidential
■ Error code 8E
Registration
Registration failed. Press Go, and try again.
Error in the adjustment of color registration result when implementing it from the control panel
cover ASSY.
Error code 8F
Registration
Registration failed. See Troubleshooting chapter in User’s Guide.
Detection of abnormal value of registration sensor sensitivity when implementing adjustment
of color registration from the control panel cover ASSY.
Error code 9D
Registration
Registration failed. See Troubleshooting chapter in User’s Guide.
Detection of incorrect registration sensor measurement value when implementing adjustment
of color registration from the control panel cover ASSY.
<User Check>
with a new one.
Step Cause Remedy

registration mark PCB ASSY registration mark PCB ASSY and
reconnect it.
failure PCB ASSY.
5 Registration mark PCB failure Replace the registration sensor holder
ASSY.
■ Error code 91
Size Mismatch
Load <size> paper and press Go.
Incorrect paper size (The paper size of the tray and that of the data are not matched.)
<User Check>
- Check the paper size to be supported and load the appropriate size of paper.
3-37 Confidential
■ Error code 94
No Paper
Load <size> paper, then press Go.
- No paper in paper tray
(The registration front actuator is not turned ON after a certain period of time has passed.)
- Paper tray is not installed into the machine.
<User Check>
- Insert the paper into the paper tray.
- Remount the paper tray to the machine.
Step Cause Remedy

1 Lift arm and roller holder ASSY Be sure to put the boss of the roller holder
not assembled correctly ASSY into the hole on the lift arm securely.
3 Plate-up function malfunction Replace the paper tray.
4 Registration front sensor failure Check the sensor performance following the
procedure described in “Function code 32”.
3-38 Confidential
■ Error code 96
No Paper
Load <size> paper in Tray.
No paper in all trays
(The manual paper actuator is not ON, and the registration front actuator is not turned ON
after a certain period of time has passed.)
<User Check>
- Load the paper into any of the trays.
■ Error code 97
Size Error
Specify the correct paper size for Tray 1.
Not supported paper
<User Check>
- Load paper with the size supported by the product.
■ Error code 9A
Manual Feed
Load <size> Paper.
No paper in manual feed slot (The manual paper actuator is not turned ON.)
Drum Cleaning
Insert the blank paper into the Manual feed slot.
No paper is inserted on the manual feed slot when drum cleaning is executed.
(The manual paper actuator is not turned ON.)
<User Check>
- Insert a paper into the manual feed slot.
Step Cause Remedy

manual sensor PCB ASSY manual sensor PCB ASSY and reconnect it.
2 Manual sensor failure Check the sensor performance following
manual sensor PCB ASSY.
3 Registration front/rear sensor Replace the registration front/rear sensor
PCB failure PCB ASSY.
3-39 Confidential
■ Error code 9F
No Paper
Reload paper, then press Go.
No paper while printing
<User Check>
- Load the paper into the paper tray.
■ Error code A1
Cover is Open
Close the Top Cover.
Top cover opened (The top cover open switch sticks at OFF.)
<User Check>
- Close the top cover.
Step Cause Remedy

1 Harness connection failure of top Check the harness connection of the top
cover switch ASSY cover switch ASSY and reconnect it.
2 The member to press the top cover Replace the top cover sub ASSY.
switch at the right side of the inside
of the top cover is broken.
3-40 Confidential
■ Error code C0 (K)
Cartridge Error
Put the Black (K) Toner Cartridge back in.
Identification failure for a new toner cartridge (K) (The new toner sensor sticks at ON.)
Error code C1 (Y)
Cartridge Error
Put the Yellow (Y) Toner Cartridge back in.
Identification failure for a new toner cartridge (Y) (The new toner sensor sticks at ON.)
Error code C2 (M)
Cartridge Error
Put the Magenta (M) Toner Cartridge back in.
Identification failure for a new toner cartridge (M) (The new toner sensor sticks at ON.)
Error code C3 (C)
Cartridge Error
Put the Cyan (C) Toner Cartridge back in.
Identification failure for a new toner cartridge (C) (The new toner sensor sticks at ON.)
<User Check>
- Install the toner cartridges into the machine properly.
Step Cause Remedy

1 Power off or top cover opened Reset the developing bias voltage and
while detecting a new toner develop roller counter. (Refer to “2.2
cartridge Develop Roller Counter Reset Function” in
Chapter 7.)
2 Toner/new sensor failure Replace the toner/new sensor PCB ASSY.
3-41 Confidential
■ Error code C6
Toner Error
One or more Toner Cartridges are not detected. Pull out and reinsert all 4
Toner Cartridges.
Pressure engagement/disengagement failure of toner cartridge (Develop release sensor
output error)
Step Cause Remedy

develop release motor develop release motor and reconnect it.

develop release sensor PCB develop release sensor PCB ASSY and
ASSY reconnect it.
3 Develop release motor failure Replace the develop release motor ASSY.
4 Develop release sensor PCB Replace the develop release sensor PCB
failure ASSY.
■ Error code C7
Out of Memory
Add more Memory.
Insufficient memory
<User Check>
- Install additional DIMM memory.
- Make a print by dividing data.
■ Error code C8
Out of Memory
Secure Print Data is full. Press Cancel and delete the previously stored data.
RAM area for secure data full
<User Check>
- Delete the stored data.
Step Cause Remedy
3-42 Confidential
■ Error code C9
DIMM Error
Make sure that the DIMM is inserted correctly.
DIMM error
<User Check>
- Check if the DIMM is installed correctly.
- Replace the DIMM with a new one.
■ Error code CA
Unusable Device
Remove the Device. Turn the power off and back on again.
Excess current to USB device
<User Check>
- Remove the USB device from the USB direct interface and turn the power off. Turn it on
again after a while.
- Replace the USB device with other one.
Step Cause Remedy
1 Harness connection failure of USB Check the harness connection of the USB
direct interface relay PCB ASSY direct interface relay PCB ASSY and
reconnect it.
2 USB direct interface relay PCB Replace the USB direct interface relay
failure PCB ASSY.
3-43 Confidential
■ Error code CB
No Belt Unit
Open the Top Cover, pull out all 4 Drum Units completely and install the Belt
Unit.
Belt unit is not installed into the machine.
(The density sensor detects that the belt unit is not installed.)
<User Check>
- Check if the belt unit is installed into the machine.
Step Cause Remedy

reconnect it.
2 Harness connection failure of Check the harness connection of shutter

shutter solenoid of the density solenoid of the density sensor and
sensor reconnect it.

ASSY.
■ Error code CE
No Waste Toner
Install the Waste Toner Box. Refer to the User’s Guide for instructions.
Waste toner box is not installed into the machine.
(It is detected by turning ON and OFF the waste toner sensor using a shutter.)
<User Check>
- Check if the waste toner box is installed into the machine.
Step Cause Remedy

3-44 Confidential
■ Error code CF
Replace WT Box
Replace the Waste Toner Box. Refer to the User’s Guide for instructions.
Waste toner box full (500 pages are printed after the waste toner sensor sticks at ON.)
Note:
The same message appears in the case of the error code F4.
<User Check>
Step Cause Remedy

2 Waste toner sensor failure Check the sensor performance following

waste toner sensor.
■ Error code DE
Print Unable DE
The connector of the fuser unit thermistor is inserted incorrectly. (It is detected that the edge
temperature is lower than 60°C.)
Step Cause Remedy
1 Connection failure of fuser unit Check the connection of the fuser unit
thermistor connector thermistor connector and reconnect it.
■ Error code E0
Print Unable E0
Program error
<User Check>
- Turn the power off and on.
3-45 Confidential
■ Error code E1
Print Unable E1
Turn off and on.
Program error
<User Check>
- Turn the power off and on.
Step Cause Remedy

■ Error code E2
Print Unable E2
Temperature error of heat roller (It is detected that the edge temperature is higher than 280°C.)
Step Cause Remedy

■ Error code E3
Print Unable E3
Drum motor origin sensor failure
Step Cause Remedy

1 Drum motor origin sensor PCB Replace the drum motor origin sensor
failure PCB ASSY.
■ Error code E9
Print Unable E9
Maintenance monitor error (The engine software detects an incorrect setting value.)
Step Cause Remedy

engine PCB ASSY the main PCB ASSY and engine PCB
ASSY, and reconnect it.
3-46 Confidential
■ Error code EC
Print Unable EC
Main fan error (The engine PCB controls the rotation of the main fan.)
Step Cause Remedy
1 Connection failure of main fan Check the connection of the main fan
connector connector and reconnect it.
2 Main fan failure Replace the main fan ASSY.
failure PCB ASSY.
■ Error code ED
Print Unable ED
Communication with the wireless LAN PCB cannot be established upon startup of the power
supply
Step Cause Remedy
1 Harness connection failure of Check the connection of the wireless LAN

wireless LAN PCB PCB connector and reconnect it.
2 Wireless LAN PCB failure Replace the wireless LAN PCB ASSY.
■ Error code EE
Print Unable EE
Unavailability of communication after connecting to the wireless LAN PCB is detected
<User Check>
- Relocate the printer because there is a possibility that large noise is generated in the
environment where the printer is installed.
Step Cause Remedy
3-47 Confidential
■ Error code EF
Print Unable EF
Low-voltage power supply PCB failure
(It is detected that the average coverage value suddenly becomes 0 %.)
<User Check>
- Turn the power off. Turn it on again after a while.
Step Cause Remedy

failure PCB ASSY.
■ Error code F2
WT Box End Soon

The waste toner box near full.
(Cleaning high voltage discharge due to reaching the life of the cleaning roller)
Note:
The same message appears in the case of the error code 5F.
<User Check>
- Prepare a new waste toner box.
Step Cause Remedy
■ Error code F4
Replace WT Box
Replace the Waste Toner Box. Refer to the User's Guide for instructions.
Waste toner box full.
(Overcurrent flows to the cleaning roller due to the end of life of the cleaning roller.)
Note:
The same message appears in the case of the error code CF.
<User Check>
Step Cause Remedy
3-48 Confidential
■ Error code F9
Machine Error F9
Power turned OFF while the function code 74 is being executed and “PARAMETER INT” is
being displayed
Step Cause Remedy
1 Incorrect operation when setting Re-enter the EEPROM customize code.

EEPROM customize code
■ Error code FA (K), FB (C), FC (M), FD (Y)
No Toner
Open the Top Cover, then install Toner Cartridge. Black (K)
No Toner
Open the Top Cover, then install Toner Cartridge. Cyan (C)
No Toner
Open the Top Cover, then install Toner Cartridge. Magenta (M)
No Toner
Open the Top Cover, then install Toner Cartridge. Yellow (Y)
The drum unit is not installed in the machine body of the product.
(No conduction on the drum electrode)
<User Check>
- Check if the drum unit of the appropriate color is installed in the machine body of the
product.
Step Cause Remedy
1 Bend of electrode contact of Correct the bend of the electrode contact

main body of the main body.
2 Dirt on electrodes of main body Clean the electrodes of the main body.
(Refer to Fig. 3-6 (P3-33))

failure PCB ASSY.
3-49 Confidential
■ Error code FE
-
Detection of incorrect measurement value of density sensor sensitivity calibration
<User Check>
- Check if the 4-color drum units are properly installed in the product.
Step Cause Remedy
1 Belt unit failure Replace the belt unit.

reconnect it.
3 Registration mark relay PCB Replace the registration mark relay PCB
failure ASSY.

ASSY.
■ Error code FF
Unusable Device
Remove the Device. Turn the power off and back on again.
Overcurrent error of wireless LAN PCB
Step Cause Remedy
3-50 Confidential
3. PAPER FEEDING PROBLEMS
Problems related to paper feeding are end user recoverable if following the User Check items.
If the same problem occurs again, follow each procedure in the order of the number described
in the Step column in the tables below.
3.1 No Feeding
<User Check>
- Check if the paper is loaded into the paper tray correctly.
- Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray, or try rotating the paper 180° in the paper tray.
- Check if the thickness of the paper is 75 to 105g/m2.
- Release the sleep mode or update the firmware to the latest version if the papers are not fed
from the manual feed slot when the machine is in the sleep mode.
Step Cause Check Result Remedy

1 Paper pick-up roller Is the paper pick-up Yes Replace the roller
worn out roller worn out? holder ASSY.
2 Plate gear damaged Is the plate gear damaged? Yes Replace the paper tray.
3 Registration front Does the registration No Re-assemble the
actuator front actuator move registration front
malfunction smoothly? actuator.
4 Disconnection of Is the harness of the Yes Reconnect the harness
the pick-up pick-up solenoid of the pick-up solenoid.
solenoid harness disconnected?
5 Registration front/ Is the problem solved Yes Replace the
rear sensor PCB by replacing the registration front/rear
failure registration front/rear sensor PCB ASSY.
sensor PCB ASSY?
6 Pick-up solenoid Does the pick-up No Replace the pick-up
failure solenoid move correctly? solenoid.
7 Paper feed motor Is the problem solved Yes Replace the paper feed
failure by replacing the paper motor ASSY.
feed motor ASSY?
8 Engine PCB failure Is the problem solved Yes Replace the engine
by replacing the engine PCB ASSY.
PCB ASSY?
Registration front/
rear sensor PCB

Roller holder ASSY
Engine PCB
Paper feed motor

Pick-up solenoid
Plate gear
Fig. 3-7
3-51 Confidential
3.2 Double Feeding
<User Check>
- Set out papers and reload them into the paper tray.
1 Separation pad or Is the surface of the Yes Replace the paper

separation roller separation pad or feeding kit.
worn out separation roller worn out?
3.3 Paper Jam

<User Check>
■ Paper jam in the paper tray and front section
1 Foreign object Is there a foreign object Yes Remove the foreign

around front section around the front section? object.
2 Belt unit Does the belt unit move No Replace the belt unit.
malfunction correctly?
3 Registration front Does the registration No Re-assemble the
actuator catching front actuator move registration front
on some position smoothly? actuator.
4 Registration rear Does the registration No Re-assemble the
actuator catching rear actuator move registration rear
5 Registration front/ Does the registration No Replace the
rear sensor PCB front/rear sensor move registration front/rear
failure smoothly? sensor PCB ASSY.
(Check it following the
procedure described in
“Function code 32”.)
3-52 Confidential
■ Paper jam in the back cover and paper eject section
1 Foreign object Is there a foreign object Yes Remove the foreign

around fuser unit around the fuser unit? object.
2 Paper eject rear Does the paper eject No Replace the paper eject
actuator top failure rear actuator top move rear actuator top.
smoothly?
Is it damaged?
3 Paper eject front Does the paper eject front No Replace the paper eject
actuator failure actuator move smoothly? front actuator.
Is it damaged?
4 Paper eject rear Does the paper eject rear No Replace the fuser unit.
actuator failure actuator move smoothly?
Is it damaged?
5 Eject front sensor Is the problem solved by Yes Replace the eject front
PCB failure replacing the eject front sensor PCB ASSY.
sensor PCB ASSY?
6 Eject rear sensor Is the problem solved by Yes Replace the eject rear
PCB failure replacing the eject rear sensor PCB ASSY.
sensor PCB ASSY?
3-53 Confidential
3.4 Dirt on Paper
<User Check>
1 Fuser unit dirty Is there dirt around the Yes Clean the entrance of
entrance of the fuser the fuser unit.
unit?
Is the pressure roller Yes Clean the pressure

dirty? roller.
2 Dirt in the paper Is the paper tray or feed Yes Wipe dirt off.
feed system system on the drum unit
dirty with toner?
3 Belt unit dirty Does dirt on the paper Yes Replace the belt unit.
disappear after
replacing the belt unit
with a new one?
4 Waste toner Is the waste toner box No Replace the waste toner
sensor failure full of toner? sensor.
5 Main PCB failure Is the problem solved Yes Replace the main PCB
after replacing the main ASSY.
PCB ASSY?
3.5 Wrinkles on Paper

<User Check>
1 Fuser unit failure Do wrinkles on the Yes Replace the fuser unit.
paper disappear after
replacing the fuser unit
with a new one?
3-54 Confidential
3.6 Curl of Paper
<User Check>
- Change the curl improvement mode setting of the driver.
- Switch the delivery roller switch lever.
Note:
Be sure not set the curl improvement mode of the driver and switch to the delivery roller
switch lever at the same time because it might worsen the level of curl.
Delivery roller switch lever
Delivery roller switch lever

<Left side>
Fig. 3-8
3-55 Confidential
4. IMAGE DEFECT TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 Image Defect Examples
Light on the whole page One color is light Faulty registration Dark
Poor fixing Completely blank Image distortion All one color
Dirt on the back of paper Vertical streaks Vertical streaks in a light background
Vertical streaks in a dark background Horizontal stripes White vertical streaks on one color image
White horizontal stripes on one color image Faint print
White spots on one color image One color spots or dirt
One color band Downward fogging of solid color Horizontal lines
Ghost Color misregistration Fogging Unstable color density Hollow print
Fig. 3-9
3-56 Confidential
4.2 Pitch Indicated in Roller Image
Image defects which occur periodically may be caused by a failure of the roller. By referring to
the table below, specify the cause based on the pitch indicated in the image of each roller.
No. Parts name The pitch which appears in the image

1 Develop roller 31 mm
2 Exposure drum 94 mm
3 Heat roller in the fuser unit 78 mm
4 Pressure roller in the fuser unit 78 mm
4.3 Troubleshooting Image Defect

Image defect related problems are user recoverable if following the User Check items. If the
same problem occurs, follow each procedure in the order of the number described in the Step
column in the tables below.
■ Light on the whole page

<User Check>
- Check the machine’s environment. High temperature and high humidity
or low temperature and low humidity conditions can cause this problem.
- If the whole page is light, toner save mode may be on. Turn off the toner
save mode.
- Replace the toner cartridge or drum unit with a new one.
- Adjust the color density from the control panel cover ASSY.
- Leave the machine for a while as the power remains ON.

1 HVPS control PCB Is the problem solved Yes Replace the HVPS
failure after replacing the HVPS control PCB ASSY.
control PCB ASSY?
2 High-voltage power Is the problem solved Yes Replace the
supply PCB failure after replacing the high-voltage power
high-voltage power supply PCB ASSY.
supply PCB ASSY?
after replacing the PCB ASSY.
engine PCB ASSY?
PCB ASSY?
5 LED head control Is the problem solved Yes Replace the LED head
PCB failure after replacing the LED control PCB ASSY.
head control PCB ASSY?
6 LED ASSY failure Is the problem solved after Yes Replace the LED ASSY.
replacing the LED ASSY?
7 Registration mark L Is the problem solved Yes Replace the
PCB failure after replacing the registration sensor
holder ASSY?
3-57 Confidential
■ One color is light
<User Check>
- Open and close the top cover and make print again.
- Check the machine’s environment. High temperature and high humidity or low temperature
and low humidity conditions can cause this problem.

1 Dirt on exposure Are the electrodes on Yes Clean both electrodes.
drum electrode the drum unit of the (Refer to Fig. 3-3
appropriate color and (P3-32) and Fig. 3-6
machine body dirty? (P3-33))
2 Dirt on develop Are the electrodes on Yes Clean both electrodes.
roller electrode the develop roller of the (Refer to Fig. 3-3
3 Dirt on belt unit Are the electrodes on Yes Clean both electrodes.
electrode the belt unit of the (Refer to Fig. 3-4
4 Dirt on LED array Is the LED array of the Yes Wipe the dirt off with a
appropriate color dirty? clean, soft, and lint-free
cloth.
5 Lifting of LED Is printing of the LED No Re-assemble the
ASSY ASSY test pattern LED ASSY.
correctly done in
“Function code 68”?
6 Toner/new sensor After replacing the toner No Replace the toner
PCB failure cartridge of the cartridge of the
appropriate color with a appropriate color.
new one, does the
same problem occur
even after printing sev-
eral pages?
7 Does the machine start Yes - Check the harness
printing even after connection of the
removing the toner toner/new sensor
cartridge of the PCB ASSY of the
appropriate color from appropriate color.
the drum unit? - Replace the toner/
new sensor PCB
ASSY of the
appropriate color.
3-58 Confidential
failure after replacing the control PCB ASSY.
HVPS control PCB
ASSY?
supply PCB ASSY?
head control PCB
ASSY?
PCB ASSY.
■ Faulty registration
1 Registration rear Does the registration No Correct catching of the

actuator catching rear actuator move registration rear
control PCB ASSY?
PCB ASSY?
3-59 Confidential
■ Dark
<User Check>
- Clean the corona wire.
1 Corona wire Are the electrodes on Yes Clean both electrodes.

conduction failure the drum unit and (Refer to Fig. 3-3
machine body dirty? (P3-32) and Fig. 3-6
(P3-33))
electrode the belt unit and (Refer to Fig. 3-4
(P3-33))
control PCB ASSY?

supply PCB ASSY?
engine PCB ASSY?
PCB ASSY?
head control PCB
ASSY?

PCB failure after replacing the registration sensor
holder ASSY?
9 Toner/new Is the problem solved Yes Replace the toner/new

sensor PCB failure after replacing the sensor PCB ASSY.
toner/new sensor PCB
ASSY?
3-60 Confidential
■ Poor fixing
<User Check>
- Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
Memo:
You can check this image defect with the function code 71.
(Refer to “1.4.14 Color test pattern (Function code 71)” in Chapter 7.)
1 Lifting of LED Is printing of the LED No Re-assemble the

ASSY ASSY test pattern LED ASSY.
correctly done in
2 Fuser unit failure Is the problem solved Yes Replace the fuser unit.
after replacing the fuser
unit?
3 Low-voltage power Is the problem solved Yes Replace the

supply PCB failure after replacing the low-voltage power
low-voltage power supply PCB ASSY.
supply PCB ASSY?
control PCB ASSY?

supply PCB ASSY?
engine PCB ASSY?
7 Toner/new Is the problem solved Yes Replace the toner/new

sensor PCB failure after replacing the sensor PCB ASSY.
toner/new sensor PCB
ASSY?
PCB?
3-61 Confidential
■ Completely blank
<User Check>

1 Developing bias Are the electrodes on the Yes Clean both electrodes.
voltage conduction drum unit and machine (Refer to Fig. 3-3 (P3-32)
failure body dirty? and Fig. 3-6 (P3-33))
2 Dirt on develop roller Are the electrodes on the Yes Clean both electrodes.
electrode develop roller and (Refer to Fig. 3-3 (P3-32)
machine body dirty? and Fig. 3-6 (P3-33))
3 LED array FFC Is the LED array FFC No Reconnect the LED array
connection failure connected securely? FFC.
4 LED ASSY failure Is the problem solved after Yes Replace the LED ASSY.
replacing the LED ASSY?
5 HVPS control PCB Is the problem solved after Yes Replace the HVPS
failure replacing the HVPS control PCB ASSY.
control PCB ASSY?
6 High-voltage power Is the problem solved after Yes Replace the high-voltage
supply PCB failure replacing the high-voltage power supply PCB ASSY.
power supply PCB ASSY?
7 LED head control Is the problem solved after Yes Replace the LED head
PCB failure replacing the LED head control PCB ASSY.
control PCB ASSY?
8 Main PCB failure Is the problem solved after Yes Replace the main PCB
replacing the main PCB ASSY.
ASSY?
■ Image distortion
<User Check>

PCB ASSY?
3-62 Confidential
■ All one color
Memo:

1 Corona wire Are the electrodes on Yes Clean both electrodes.
failure the drum unit of the (Refer to Fig. 3-3
2 Is the corona wire Yes Replace the drum unit.
damaged?
control PCB ASSY?
supply PCB ASSY?
5 LED ASSY failure Is the problem solved Yes Replace the LED ASSY.
after replacing the LED
ASSY?
head control PCB
ASSY?
PCB ASSY?
3-63 Confidential
■ Dirt on the back of paper
<User Check>

1 Fuser unit dirty Is the pressure roller Yes Print approximate 10
dirty? pages.
Is the fuser unit dirty? No Replace the fuser unit.
dirty with toner?
3 Waste toner Is the waste toner box Yes Replace the waste toner
sensor failure full of toner? sensor.
control PCB ASSY?
supply PCB ASSY?
3-64 Confidential
■ Vertical streaks
<User Check>
- This problem may occur with noise which is caused by
dirt on the corona wire in the drum unit. In this case,
clean the corona wire.
Note:
dirty with toner?
2 Exposure drum Is there vertical dirt with Yes Clean the drum unit.
dirty toner on the surface of
the exposure drum?
3 Bend of tray ground Is the tray ground spring Yes Replace the paper tray.
spring bent?
(Refer to Fig. 3-10)
4 Scratch on the heat Is there a scratch on the Yes Replace the fuser unit.
roller surface of the heat roller?
ASSY?
Note:
If the machine prints the same pattern, especially including vertical streaks, continuously,
black vertical streaks may appear on the paper since the electrostatic performance of the
exposure drum is decreased temporally.
Tray ground spring
Paper tray
<Bottom of paper tray>
Fig. 3-10
3-65 Confidential
■ Vertical streaks in a light background
<User Check>
- Clean the inside of the machine and the corona wire in the drum unit.
- Clean the LED array with a soft lint-free cloth.
Note:
ASSY?
■ Vertical streaks in a dark background
<User Check>
ASSY?
3-66 Confidential
■ Horizontal stripes
<User Check>
1 Dirt on the charged Are the electrodes on Yes Clean both electrodes.
electrode the drum unit and (Refer to Fig. 3-3
(P3-33))
2 Bend of tray ground Is the tray ground spring Yes Replace the paper tray.
spring bent? (Refer to
Fig. 3-10 (P3-65))
3 Toner attached on Are the horizontal Yes This problem will

the develop roller stripes at 31 mm disappear by printing
(develop roller approximate 10 pages.
circumference) If the same problem
intervals? occurs, replace the
toner cartridge.
4 Scratch on the heat Are the horizontal Yes Replace the fuser unit.
roller stripes at 78 mm (heat
roller circumference)
intervals?
control PCB ASSY?
3-67 Confidential
■ White vertical streaks on one color image
<User Check>
- Check if there is no dust in the gap between the toner cartridge and drum frame.
- Clean the relevant color LED array on which color loss occurs with a soft lint-free cloth.
- Check the machine’s environment. High temperature and high humidity or low temperature
and low humidity conditions can cause this problem.
- Damp (wet) paper might be used. Try to change to freshly unpacked paper.
1 Condensation Has condensation Yes Try to print several

occurred inside the pages or leave the
machine? machine 2 hours to
allow it to reach room
temperature.
2 LED array failure Is the problem solved Yes Replace the LED ASSY.
ASSY?
3-68 Confidential
■ White horizontal stripes on one color image
<User Check>
- The problem may disappear by itself. Try printing multiple pages to clear this problem
especially if the machine has not been used for a long time.
- The drum unit may be damaged. Replace the drum unit with a new one.

control PCB ASSY?
supply PCB ASSY?
engine PCB ASSY?
■ Faint print
<User Check>
- Check that the machine is installed on a level surface.
1 Lifting of LED ASSY Is printing of the LED No Re-assemble the LED

ASSY test pattern ASSY.
correctly done in
2 Toner/new Is the “Replace Toner” No Replace the toner/new

sensor PCB failure message indicated on sensor PCB ASSY.
the LCD when replacing
the toner cartridge with
the one which has
reached the end of life?
3-69 Confidential
■ White spots on one color image
<User Check>
- Toner may be empty. Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
- If the same problem occurs after printing a few pages, the adhesive of the label or the like,
paper powder or dirt may be attached on the surface of the exposure drum. When the size
of the white spots is less than 0.35mm, feed the paper from the manual feed slot one to
three times to clean the drum. (Refer to “Drum cleaning function of product” in the next
page.) When the size of the spots is 0.35mm or more, or when the same problem occurs
after feeding the drum cleaning sheet, wipe off the dirt on the exposure drum with a cotton
swab. (Refer to “Drum unit cleaning” in this chapter.)
- The belt unit may be damaged. Replace the belt unit with a new one.

1 Toner cartridge Are the white spots at 31 Yes If the develop roller
failure mm (develop roller surface is scratched,
circumference) intervals? replace the toner cartridge.
2 Toner/new Is the “Replace Toner” No Replace the toner/new
the one which has
3-70 Confidential
Note:
If there is any problem in the print quality, be sure to clean the drum unit in accordance with
“Drum cleaning function of product” provided below.
If the problem still persists, be sure to clean the drum unit manually in accordance with
“Drum unit cleaning” in this chapter.
<Drum cleaning function of product>

(1) Open the manual feed slot cover.
Fig. 3-11
(2) Using both hands, slide the manual feed slot paper guides to the width of the paper that
you are going to use.
Fig. 3-12
(3) Using both hands, put one piece of paper in the manual feed slot until the front edge of
the paper touches the paper feed roller. Wait until the machine automatically feeds
the paper. When you feel the machine pull in the paper, let go.
Fig. 3-13
3-71 Confidential
Note:
- Make sure that the paper is straight and in the correct position on the manual feed slot.
If it is not, the paper may not be fed properly, resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam.
- Do not put more than one piece of paper in the manual feed slot at any one time, as it
may cause a jam.
- If you put paper in the manual feed slot before the printer is in the ready state, an error
may occur and the printer will stop printing.
(4) Press + or - to choose “Color Correction.” Press OK.

(5) Press + or - to choose “Drum Cleaning.”
(6) Press Go. The printer will pull in the piece of paper and start cleaning the drum unit.
Fig. 3-14
(7) When the printer has finished cleaning, “Completed” appears on the LCD. Press Cancel
so that the printer returns to the ready state.
(8) Repeat steps (3) to (7) two more times.
3-72 Confidential
<Drum unit cleaning>
(1) Pull the drum unit out of the machine and take all the toner cartridges out of the drum unit.
Note:
We recommend that you place the drum unit on a clean, flat surface with a piece of
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
(2) See the print sample to identify the color causing the problem. The color of the spots is
the color of the drum you should clean. For example, if the spots are cyan, you should
clean the drum for cyan. Put the print sample in front of the drum, and find the exact
position of the poor print.
Fig. 3-15
(3) Turn the drum unit gear to the direction of the arrow as shown in the figure below by hand
while looking at the surface of the drum “1”.
“1”
Fig. 3-16
(4) When you have found the mark on the drum that matches the print sample, wipe the
surface of the drum gently with a cotton swab until the dust or paper powder on the
surface comes off.
Note:
DO NOT clean the surface of the photosensitive drum with a sharp object.
Fig. 3-17
3-73 Confidential
■ One color spots or dirt
<User Check>
- Damp (wet) paper might be used. Try to changing to freshly unopened paper.
- If the same problem occurs after printing a few pages, the adhesive of a label or the like,
paper powder or dirt may be attached on the surface of the exposure drum. Feed the paper
from the manual feed slot one to three times to clean the drum. (Refer to “Drum cleaning
function of product” in this chapter.)
When the same problem occurs after feeding the drum cleaning sheet, wipe off the dirt on
the exposure drum with a cotton swab. (Refer to “Drum unit cleaning” in the previous pages.)
- The belt unit may be damaged. Replace the belt unit with a new one.
1 Fuser unit failure Are the spots at 78 mm Yes Replace the fuser unit.
(heat roller
circumference)
intervals?
2 Toner/new Is the “Replace Toner” Yes Replace the toner/new

the one which has
3-74 Confidential
■ One color band
<User Check>
- Clean the inside of the machine and the corona wire in the drum unit. If the same problem
occurs after cleaning, replace the drum unit with a new one.
- The paper tray ground terminal provided in the machine body may be dirty. Clean the
contact with a dry cloth.
■ Downward fogging of solid color

<User Check>
control PCB ASSY?

supply PCB ASSY?
engine PCB ASSY?
after replacing the ASSY.
main PCB ASSY?
3-75 Confidential
■ Horizontal lines
<User Check>
- The paper tray ground terminal provided in the machine
body may be dirty. Clean the contact with a dry cloth.

1 Dirt on charged Are the electrodes on Yes Clean both electrodes.
electrode the drum unit and (Refer to Fig. 3-3 (P3-32)
2 Paper tray ground Is the paper tray ground Yes Correct bending of
terminal provided terminal bent, which is paper tray ground
in machine body provided in the machine terminal.
body?
3 Toner attached on Are the horizontal lines Yes This symptom might
the develop roller at 31 mm (develop roller disappear after making
circumference) approximate 10 prints.
intervals?
4 Scratch on the heat Are the horizontal lines Yes Replace the fuser unit.
roller at 78 mm (heat roller
circumference)
intervals?
control PCB ASSY?
supply PCB ASSY.
3-76 Confidential
■ Ghost
<User Check>
- Check the machine’s environment, conditions such as high humidity may
cause this situation to occur.
- Check that the appropriate media type is selected in the printer driver.

control PCB ASSY?
supply PCB ASSY?
engine PCB ASSY?
■ Color misregistration
<User Check>
- Implement the adjustment of color registration from the control panel
cover ASSY.
engine PCB ASSY?

PCB ASSY failure after replacing the registration sensor
holder ASSY?
3-77 Confidential
■ Fogging
<User Check>
- Do not use acid paper.
1 Toner/new Is the toner sensor No Replace the toner/new

sensor PCB failure performed normally by sensor PCB ASSY.
following the procedure
described in “Function
code 32” to check?
control PCB ASSY?

supply PCB ASSY?
engine PCB ASSY?
Note:
This problem often occurs when the drum unit or toner cartridge is nearly at the end of life.
3-78 Confidential
■ Unstable color density
<User Check>
- Make a print on a different type of paper.
1 Drum unit Are the electrodes on Yes Clean both electrodes.

conduction failure the drum unit and (Refer to Fig. 3-3 (P3-32)
2 Toner cartridge Are the electrodes on Yes Clean both electrodes.
connection failure the toner cartridge and (Refer to Fig. 3-3 (P3-32)
electrode the belt unit and (Refer to Fig. 3-4 (P3-32)
engine PCB ASSY?
control PCB ASSY?
supply PCB ASSY?
PCB ASSY?
3-79 Confidential
■ Hollow print
<User Check>
- Select “Improve Toner Fixing” in the printer driver, or select “Thicker
Paper” in Paper Type.
- Check the machine’s environment, conditions such as high humidity and
low humidity may cause this situation to occur.
- Make a print on a different type of paper.
1 Fuser unit failure Is the problem solved Yes Replace the fuser unit.
after replacing the fuser
unit?
3-80 Confidential
5. SOFTWARE SETTING PROBLEMS
The end user can solve problems pertaining to software, for instance, print cannot be made
from a computer although test print and printer setting print can be made from the machine, by
following the User Check items. If the same problem occurs, follow each procedure in the
order of the number described in the Step column in the tables below.
5.1 Cannot Print Data

<User Check>
- Check that the USB cable or LAN cable is not damaged.
- Check that the correct machine is selected if you have an interface switching device.
- Check the descriptions on the software setting in the user’s guide.
- Restore the settings at factory shipment. (Refer to User's guide)
1 Failure inside the Does the machine print No Identify the error type,
machine “Printer Settings”? and then refer to the
specified section of this
chapter.
2 Machine For Macintosh, has the No Verify the product ID.

connection product ID been (Hexadecimal)
verified? Product ID:
HL-3040CN: 0037
HL-3045CN: 004Eh
HL-3070CW: 0038
HL-3075CW: 004Fh
3 USB direct interface Is the problem solved Yes Replace the USB direct
relay PCB failure after replacing the USB interface relay PCB
(Wireless LAN direct interface relay ASSY.
model only) PCB ASSY?
PCB ASSY?
3-81 Confidential
6. NETWORK PROBLEMS
6.1 Cannot Make a Print through Network Connection

<User Check>
- Check the descriptions in the network user’s guide.
- Restore the settings at factory shipment. (Refer to User's guide)
1 Mismatch of MAC Is the problem solved Yes Obtain the MAC

address (Ethernet after obtaining the address (Ethernet
Address) between correct MAC address Address).
wireless LAN PCB (Ethernet Address)? (Refer to “2.1 Acquiring
and main PCB MAC Address (Ethernet
(Wireless LAN Address) from Main
model only) PCB” in Chapter 6.)
2 Wireless LAN PCB Is the problem solved Yes Replace the wireless
failure after replacing the LAN PCB ASSY.
(Wireless LAN wireless LAN PCB
model only) ASSY?
PCB ASSY?
3-82 Confidential
7. OTHERS PROBLEMS
7.1 The Machine is Not Turned ON, or The LCD Indication

Does Not Appear.
1 Harness Is the harness of the No Reconnect the panel

connection failure panel PCB ASSY PCB ASSY harness.
of panel PCB connected correctly?
ASSY
2 Harness Is the harness of the No Reconnect the LCD

connection failure LCD connected harness.
of LCD correctly?
3 LCD failure Is the problem solved Yes Replace the LCD.

after replacing the
LCD?
4 Low-voltage power Is the problem solved Yes Replace the low-voltage

supply PCB failure after replacing the power supply PCB
low-voltage power ASSY.
supply PCB ASSY?
5 Panel PCB failure Is the problem solved Yes Replace the panel PCB
after replacing the panel ASSY.
PCB ASSY?
failure after replacing the control PCB ASSY.
HVPS control PCB
ASSY?

supply PCB ASSY?
PCB ASSY?
Note:
When the error code 36 occurs, the power is forcibly turned OFF, and the machine cannot
be turned ON for 10 minutes.
3-83 Confidential
7.2 The Fan Does Not Work.

1 Harness Is the harness of the No Reconnect the harness
connection failure appropriate fan of the appropriate fan
of the appropriate connected correctly? correctly.
fan
2 Failure of the Is the problem solved Yes Replace the appropriate
appropriate fan after replacing the fan.
appropriate fan?
engine PCB ASSY?
control PCB ASSY?
supply PCB ASSY? Replace the appropriate
fan.
6 Low-voltage power Is the problem solved Yes Replace the low-voltage
supply PCB failure after replacing the power supply PCB
low-voltage power ASSY.
supply PCB ASSY?
PCB ASSY?
3-84 Confidential
CHAPTER 4
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
Confidential
CHAPTER 4
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
This chapter details consumable parts and periodical maintenance parts. This chapter also covers
procedures for disassembling and assembling periodical maintenance parts.
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..........................................................................4-1
2. CONSUMABLE PARTS .............................................................................4-1
3. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PARTS .....................................................4-2

3.1 Periodical Maintenance Parts ..................................................................................... 4-2
3.2 Procedures to Replace Periodical Maintenance Parts ............................................... 4-3
3.2.1 Fuser unit........................................................................................................... 4-4
3.2.2 Paper feeding kit.............................................................................................. 4-16
Confidential
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
To avoid creating secondary problems by mishandling, follow the warnings below during
maintenance work.
WARNING
- Always turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet before
accessing any parts inside the machine.
- When opening the top cover or back cover to access any parts inside the machine, never
touch the shaded parts shown in the following figures.
2. CONSUMABLE PARTS
Parts name Approximate life
Toner Black Starter Approximately 1,000 pages (When printing A4-size

cartridge cartridge paper in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798)
Standard Approximately 2,200 pages (When printing A4-size

cartridge paper in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798)
Cyan, Starter Approximately 1,000 pages (When printing A4-size

Magenta, cartridge paper in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798)
Yellow
Standard Approximately 1,400 pages (When printing A4-size
cartridge paper in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798)
Drum unit Approximately 15,000 pages (When printing one A4-

size paper at a time)
The life expectancy varies according to the use
condition.
Belt unit Approximately 50,000 pages (When printing A4-size

paper)
The life expectancy varies according to the use
condition.
Waste toner box Approximately 50,000 pages
4-1 Confidential
3. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PARTS
3.1 Periodical Maintenance Parts

Periodical maintenance parts are the parts to be replaced periodically to maintain product
quality. These parts would affect the product quality if they loose their functionality even if they
do not appear to be damaged or there is no change in their appearance.
The periodical maintenance parts listed in the table below should be replaced according to the
service life.
Replacement
Parts name LCD Q’ty Approximate life
procedure
Fuser unit Replace Fuser 1 50,000 pages Refer to 3.2.1
Paper feeding kit* Replace PF Kit1 1 50,000 pages Refer to 3.2.2
* The paper feeding kit includes the separation pad ASSY, pad spring and roller holder ASSY.
When replacing the periodical maintenance parts, each of the counters need to be reset in
order to record the number of replacement times. (Refer to “2.3 Parts Life Reset Function” in
Chapter 7.)
The number of printed pages of the machine can be checked on Print Settings. (Refer to “2.4
Printout of Printer Settings” in Chapter 7.)
The actual number of printed page will vary depending on the type of print job or the paper to
being used. The figures indicated as the approximate life in the table above are worked out
when printing a general business document (in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798) on A4-size
paper.
Note:
- Always turn off the power switch of the machine and unplug the power cord from the
power outlet before replacing the periodical maintenance parts.
- If the fuser unit is replaced after an error related to the fuser unit occurs, you need to wait
until the machine sufficiently cools down before replacing the unit. After replacing the
unit, turn ON the machine and leave it for approximately fifteen minutes. This will make
the machine to be released from the error.
4-2 Confidential
3.2 Procedures to Replace Periodical Maintenance Parts
■ Preparation
Prior to proceeding with the disassembly procedure,
(1) Unplug
- the AC cord,
- the USB cable, if connected,
- the LAN cable, if connected, and
- the USB cable for PictBridge or USB flash memory drive, if connected.
(2) Remove the Paper tray.
Paper tray
4-3 Confidential
3.2.1 Fuser unit
<Uninstalling procedure>
(1) Open the Back cover.
Back cover
<Back side>
Fig. 4-1
(2) Release the Hook and remove the Back cover stopper L and R from the Main body.
Main body
Hook
Back cover stopper L
Back cover
Back cover stopper R

<Back side>
Fig. 4-2
4-4 Confidential
(3) Remove the Bush of the Back cover from the Shaft at the right side of the Main body.
Bush
Main body
3a
3b
Shaft
<Right side>
Shaft
3c
Back cover
Bush
<Back side>
Fig. 4-3
(4) Remove the Back cover from the Shaft at the left of the Main body.
Main body
<Left side>
Shaft
Back cover
Fig. 4-4
4-5 Confidential
(5) Release the Fuser cover lock lever L and R, and open the Fuser cover.
Fuser cover lock lever L
5a
5b
Fuser cover lock lever R
Fuser cover
5a
<Back side>
Fig. 4-5
(6) Take out the Shaft at the left side of the Fuser cover from the Notch on the Bush of the
Side frame L.
(7) Take out the Shaft at the right side of the Fuser cover from the Bush of the LVPS cover,
and remove the Fuser cover.
Side frame L
Notch on the bush
7a
Shaft at the left side
LVPS cover
7b
Bush
Fuser cover
Shaft at the right side <Back side>
Fig. 4-6
4-6 Confidential
(8) Remove the Taptite bind B M3x12 screw, and then remove the Fuser cover L from the
Fuser unit.
Fuser cover L
Taptite bind B M3x12
Fuser unit
<Back side>
Fig. 4-7
(9) Remove the Taptite bind B M3x12 screw, and then remove the Fuser cover R from the
Fuser unit.
Fuser cover R
Fuser unit
<Back side>
Fig. 4-8
4-7 Confidential
(10) Disconnect the two Connectors (CN1, CN3) from the Eject front sensor PCB ASSY.
Connector
Eject front sensor PCB ASSY
Connector
CN3
CN1
CN1
CN3 <Back side>
Fig. 4-9
(11) Disconnect the two Electrode terminals from the Fuser unit.
Electrode terminal (small)
Electrode terminal (large)
Fuser unit
<Back side>
Fig. 4-10
4-8 Confidential
(12) Remove the two Taptite pan B M4x14 screws, and then remove the Fuser unit from the
Main body while holding the “A.”
Main body
Taptite pan B M4x14
“A”
Fuser unit Pressure roller ASSY
Taptite pan B M4x14

<Back side>
Fig. 4-11
Note:
- Do not apply a physical impact or vibration to the Fuser unit.
- Do not touch the roller and electrodes as shown in the figure below to prevent
breakage of the Fuser unit.
Fuser unit Fuser unit
Fig. 4-12
4-9 Confidential
<Installing procedure>
(1) Assemble the Fuser unit while holding the “A”, and then secure it with the two Taptite pan
B M4x14 screws.
Main body
Taptite pan B M4x14
“A”
Fuser unit Pressure roller ASSY

Taptite pan B M4x14
<Back side>
Fig. 4-13
Note:
The Fuser unit for replacement is transported while the pressure roller is held lightly to
prevent deformation of the pressure roller. When assembling the Fuser unit, make
sure to assemble the Fuser unit to the product first, and then remove the Spacer in the
direction of the arrow from the Fuser unit.
Spacer
Fuser unit
Spacer
Fig. 4-14
4-10 Confidential
(2) Connect the two Electrode terminals into the Fuser unit.
Fuser unit
<Back side>
Fig. 4-15
(3) Connect the two connectors (CN1, CN3) into the Eject front sensor PCB ASSY.
Connector
Connector
CN3
CN1
CN1
CN3
<Back side>
Fig. 4-16
4-11 Confidential
(4) Assemble the Fuser cover R to the Fuser unit with the Taptite bind B M3x12 screw.
Note:
Do not pinch the harness from the low-voltage power supply PCB ASSY to the Fuser
unit.
Fuser cover R
Fuser unit
<Back side>
Fig. 4-17
(5) Assemble the Fuser cover L to the Fuser unit with the Taptite bind B M3x12 screw.
Note:
Mount the Fuser cover L as holding down the harness of the thermistor to the Side
frame L side. (If the harness is protruded, it hooks up the eject front actuator.)
Side frame L
Fuser cover L
Fuser unit
<Back side>
Fig. 4-18
4-12 Confidential
(6) Assemble the Shaft at the right side of the Fuser cover to the Bush of the LVPS cover.
(7) Assemble the Shaft at the left side of the Fuser cover to the Notch on the bush of the Side
frame L.
Side frame L
Notch on the bush
7
6b Shaft at the left side
LVPS cover
6a
Bush
Fuser cover
<Back side>
Shaft at the right side
Fig. 4-19
(8) Close the Fuser cover.
8b
Fuser cover lock lever R 8a
Fuser cover
8b
<Back side>
Fig. 4-20
4-13 Confidential
(9) Assemble the Back cover to the Shaft at the left side of the Main body.
Main body
<Left side>
Shaft
Back cover
Fig. 4-21
(10) Assemble the Bush of the Back cover to the Shaft at the right side of the Main body.
Bush
Main body
10c
10b
Shaft
<Right side>
Shaft
10a
Back cover
Bush
<Back side>
Fig. 4-22
4-14 Confidential
(11) Assemble the back cover stopper L and back cover stopper R to the main body.
Main body
Hook
Back cover
<Back side>
Fig. 4-23
(12) Close the Back cover.
Back cover
<Back side>
Fig. 4-24
(13) After replacing the Fuser unit, reset the counter. (Refer to “2.3 Parts Life Reset Function”
in Chapter7.)
4-15 Confidential
3.2.2 Paper feeding kit
<Uninstalling procedure>
(1) Release the two Hooks of the Separation pad ASSY from the Paper tray.
(2) Release the two Pins to remove the Separation pad ASSY from Paper tray.
Hook
Separation pad ASSY
Pin Hook
Pin
Paper tray 2b
2a
Fig. 4-25
(3) Remove the Pad spring from the Paper tray.
Note:
Be careful not to loose the Pad spring.
Pad spring
Paper tray
Fig. 4-26
4-16 Confidential
(4) Push the Lift arm to the back and remove “B” of the Roller holder ASSY from “A” of the Lift
arm, and the Roller holder ASSY rotates in the direction of the arrow 4b.
“A”
Roller holder ASSY
4a “B”
Paper feed unit
Lift arm
4a
4b
“B”
Roller holder
ASSY
“A”
Lift arm
Paper feed unit 4b
<Front>
Fig. 4-27
(5) Slide the Roller holder ASSY in the direction of the arrow 5 and remove it from the “C” of
the Paper feed unit.
(6) Slide the Roller holder ASSY in the direction of the arrow 6a and 6b in this order and
remove it.
Paper feed unit
“C”
5 6a
6b
Roller holder ASSY
Fig. 4-28
4-17 Confidential
<Installing procedure>
(1) Align the shaft of the roller holder ASSY to the hole of the Paper feed unit and insert it into
the hole.
Paper feed unit
1a
Paper feed unit
1b
1a
Roller holder ASSY
Shaft
Hole
Fig. 4-29
(2) Slide the Roller holder ASSY in the direction of the arrow 2a and 2b in this order, and fit
the “B” of the Roller holder ASSY into the “A” of the Paper feed unit.
Paper feed unit

“A" “B"
2a 2b
Roller holder ASSY
Fig. 4-30
4-18 Confidential
(3) Turn the Roller holder ASSY in the direction of the arrow 3a and insert the “D” of the
Roller holder ASSY into the “C” of the Lift arm.
“C”
Roller holder ASSY
“D”
3b Paper feed unit
Lift arm
3b
3a
“D”
Roller holder
“C” ASSY
Lift arm 3a
Paper feed unit
<Front>
Fig. 4-31
(4) Assemble the Pad spring onto the Paper tray.
Pad spring
Paper tray
Fig. 4-32
4-19 Confidential
(5) Put the two Pins of the Separation pad ASSY into the Paper tray.
Note:
Apply grease to the separation pad ASSY before mounting the Paper tray.
(Refer to “4. LUBRICATUION” in Chapter 5.)
Separation pad ASSY
Pin
Pin
Paper tray
Fig. 4-33
(6) Set the Pad spring in a way that the “E” of the Separation pad ASSY fits into the “F”, and
assemble the two Hooks of the Separation pad ASSY to the Paper tray.
Note:
Check that the Separation pad ASSY pivots up and down smoothly by pushing it
gently.
“E”
Hook
Separation pad ASSY
“F”
Hook
Pad spring
Fig. 4-34
(7) After replacing the Paper feeding kit, reset the counter. (Refer to “2.3 Parts Life Reset
Function” in Chapter7.)
4-20 Confidential
CHAPTER 5
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Confidential
CHAPTER 5
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
This chapter describes procedures for disassembling and assembling the machine with relates notes.
The provided disassembly order flow enables you to take in the quickest way to get an involved part at
a glance.
At the start of disassembling, you can check the disassembly order flow which guides you through a
shortcut to get to the part.
This chapter also covers screw tightening torques and lubrication points where the specified lubrication
should be applied when the machine is assembled.
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..........................................................................5-1
2. PACKING....................................................................................................5-2
3. SCREW TORQUE LIST .............................................................................5-3
4. LUBRICATION ...........................................................................................5-5
5. OVERVIEW OF GEARS.............................................................................5-7
6. HARNESS ROUTING...............................................................................5-11
7. DISASSEMBLY FLOW.............................................................................5-26
8. DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE ................................................................5-27

8.1 Support Flap ............................................................................................................. 5-28
8.2 Roller Holder ASSY .................................................................................................. 5-29
8.3 Separation Pad ASSY .............................................................................................. 5-31
8.4 Back Cover/Back Cover Stopper L/R ....................................................................... 5-33
8.5 Fuser Cover .............................................................................................................. 5-36
8.6 Paper Eject Front Actuator ....................................................................................... 5-37
8.7 Fuser Unit ................................................................................................................. 5-39
8.8 Side Cover L ASSY/Access Cover ........................................................................... 5-43
8.9 Side Cover R ASSY.................................................................................................. 5-46
8.10 Control Panel Cover ASSY..................................................................................... 5-48
8.11 Wireless LAN PCB ASSY (Wireless LAN model only)............................................ 5-50
8.12 Panel PCB ASSY ................................................................................................... 5-52
8.13 Rubber Key Printed ASSY...................................................................................... 5-53
8.14 LCD/Back Light Film ............................................................................................... 5-54
8.15 USB Direct Interface Relay PCB ASSY (Wireless LAN model only) ...................... 5-56
Confidential
8.16 Panel Light Guide ................................................................................................... 5-57
8.17 Front Cover............................................................................................................. 5-58
8.18 Manual Feed Slot ASSY ......................................................................................... 5-60
8.19 TC Arm Spring ........................................................................................................ 5-61
8.20 Arm Guide L Cover ................................................................................................. 5-65
8.21 Top Cover Sub ASSY ............................................................................................. 5-66
8.22 Inner Chute 2 ASSY ............................................................................................... 5-69
8.23 FFC Harness:MAIN-LED CTL ................................................................................ 5-70
8.24 LED Power Relay PCB ASSY ................................................................................ 5-75
8.25 LED Head Control PCB ASSY ............................................................................... 5-76
8.26 LED ASSY/Holder Hook ......................................................................................... 5-78
8.27 Z Spring L/Z Spring R ............................................................................................. 5-87
8.28 Develop Release Motor ASSY ............................................................................... 5-89
8.29 Main PCB ASSY ..................................................................................................... 5-91
8.30 Engine PCB ASSY ................................................................................................. 5-92
8.31 Main PCB Insulation Sheet/Engine Insulation Sheet.............................................. 5-93
8.32 Main PCB Shield Plate ........................................................................................... 5-94
8.33 Engine Shield Plate ................................................................................................ 5-95
8.34 Registration Mark Relay PCB ASSY ...................................................................... 5-96
8.35 Drum Develop Drive Unit ........................................................................................ 5-97
8.36 Develop Drive Motor ............................................................................................. 5-102
8.37 Paper Feed Motor ASSY ...................................................................................... 5-103
8.38 Paper Feed Unit ................................................................................................... 5-105
8.39 Registration Front/Rear Sensor PCB ASSY ......................................................... 5-108
8.40 Manual Sensor PCB ASSY .................................................................................. 5-110
8.41 Pick-up Sector Gear Spring/Friction Spring ...........................................................5-111
8.42 PF Registration Solenoid...................................................................................... 5-114
8.43 Pick-up Solenoid/Pick-up Solenoid Lever Spring ................................................. 5-116
8.44 Fuser/Eject Drive Motor ........................................................................................ 5-118
8.45 Fuser/Eject Drive Motor Sensor PCB ASSY ........................................................ 5-119
8.46 Top Cover Arm R .................................................................................................. 5-120
8.47 Top Cover Arm L................................................................................................... 5-121
8.48 Air Filter Holder ASSY/Ozone Filter ..................................................................... 5-122
8.49 Paper Eject Rear Actuator/Paper Eject Rear Actuator Spring/
Paper Eject Rear Actuator Top ............................................................................. 5-125
8.50 Eject Rear Sensor PCB ASSY ............................................................................. 5-128
8.51 Eject Front Sensor PCB ASSY ............................................................................. 5-129
8.52 Toner/New Sensor PCB ASSY ............................................................................. 5-130
8.53 Belt Drive ASSY ................................................................................................... 5-131
Confidential
8.54 Drum Motor Origin Sensor PCB ASSY................................................................. 5-132
8.55 LV Fan ASSY........................................................................................................ 5-133
8.56 Main Fan ASSY .................................................................................................... 5-135
8.57 Low-voltage Power Supply PCB ASSY ................................................................ 5-136
8.58 Registration Sensor Holder ASSY ........................................................................ 5-141
8.59 High-voltage Power Supply PCB ASSY ............................................................... 5-142
8.60 HVPS Control PCB ASSY .................................................................................... 5-148
8.61 Waste Toner Sensor ............................................................................................. 5-149
8.62 Develop Release Sensor PCB ASSY ................................................................... 5-152
8.63 Belt Cleaner Spring............................................................................................... 5-153
8.64 TR Head Spring .................................................................................................... 5-157
8.65 Side Frame R ....................................................................................................... 5-159
8.66 Toner LED PCB ASSY/LED Holder ...................................................................... 5-162
8.67 LM Hook B/LM Hook C/Hook Spring BC10 .......................................................... 5-163
Confidential
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
To avoid creating secondary problems by mishandling, follow the warnings and precautions
below during maintenance work.
WARNING
Some parts inside the machine are extremely hot immediately after the machine is used.
When opening the top cover or back cover to access any parts inside the machine, never
touch the shaded parts shown in the following figures.
Caution:
- Be careful not to lose screws, washers, or other parts removed.
- Be sure to apply grease to the gears and applicable positions specified in this chapter.
- When using soldering irons or other heat-generating tools, take care not to accidentally
damage parts such as wires, PCBs and covers.
- Static electricity charged in your body may damage electronic parts. When transporting
PCBs, be sure to wrap them in conductive sheets.
- When replacing the PCB and all the other related parts, put on a grounding wrist band and
perform the job on a static mat. Also take care not to touch the conductor sections on the
flat cables or on the wire harness.
- After disconnecting flat cables, check that each cable is not damaged at its end or
shortcircuited.
- When connecting flat cables, do not insert them at an angle. After insertion, check that the
cables are not at an angle.
- When connecting or disconnecting cable connectors, hold the connector body, not the
cables. If the connector has a lock, release the connector lock first to release it.
- After a repair, check not only the repaired portion but also all connectors. Also check that
other related portions are functioning properly before operational checks.
- Violently closing the top cover without mounting the toner cartridge and the drum unit can
damage this product.
5-1 Confidential
2. PACKING
Accessory bag CD ASSY
CD ASSY
Quick Setup guide

Option carton
Option carton
Drum/Toner ASSY
AC cord
Polystyrene pad upper
Machine
Polystyrene pad lower
Carton
5-2 Confidential
3. SCREW TORQUE LIST
Note:
For verifying the shape of each screw, refer to “APPENDIX 4 SCREW CATALOGUE”.
Tightening torque
Location of screw Screw type Q'ty
N·m (kgf·cm)
Fuser cover L Taptite bind B M3x12 1 0.60±0.10 (6±1)
Fuser cover R Taptite bind B M3x12 1 0.60±0.10 (6±1)
Fuser unit Taptite pan B M4x14 2 0.80±0.10 (8±1)
Side cover L ASSY Taptite bind B M4x12 2 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
Side cover R ASSY Taptite bind B M4x12 2 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
Main shield cover plate ASSY Taptite cup S M3x6 SR 4 0.50±0.10 (5±1)
LED FG harness ASSY
Control panel cover ASSY Taptite bind B M4x12 2 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
USB direct interface relay PCB Taptite bind B M3x8 2 0.50±0.10 (5±1)
ASSY
FG harness
USB holder Taptite bind B M3x8 2 0.50±0.10 (5±1)
Front cover Taptite bind B M4x12 2 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
Inner chute 2 ASSY Taptite bind B M4x12 2 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
Arm guide L Taptite bind B M4x12 2 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
TC harness cover Taptite bind B M4x12 1 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
Arm guide R Taptite bind B M4x12 2 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
Sub frame ASSY Taptite bind B M4x12 3 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
LED PCB cover Taptite cup S M3x6 SR 4 0.50±0.10 (5±1)
LED head control PCB ASSY Taptite cup S M3x6 SR 4 0.50±0.10 (5±1)
Develop release motor ASSY Taptite bind S M3x5 1 0.70±0.10 (7±1)
Main PCB ASSY Taptite cup S M3x6 SR 3 0.50±0.10 (5±1)
Taptite cup S M3x8 SR 1 0.50±0.10 (5±1)
Engine PCB ASSY (front side) Taptite cup S M3x6 SR 2 0.80±0.10 (8±1)
Engine PCB ASSY (rear side) Taptite cup S M3x6 SR 2 0.50±0.10 (5±1)
Main PCB shield plate Taptite bind B M4x12 1 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
Engine shield plate Taptite bind B M4x12 1 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
Develop drive plate ASSY Taptite cup S M3x6 SR 2 0.80±0.10 (8±1)
Taptite bind B M4x12 2 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
Under bar Taptite bind B M4x12 4 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
Under bar earth plate Taptite cup S M3x6 SR 1 0.80±0.10 (8±1)
Drum develop drive unit Taptite bind B M4x12 3 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
Develop drive motor Screw bind M3x4 3 0.50±0.05 (5±0.5)
Paper feed motor ASSY Screw bind M3x4 3 0.50±0.05 (5±0.5)
5-3 Confidential
Tightening torque
Location of screw Screw type Q'ty
N·m (kgf·cm)
Paper feed unit Taptite cup S M3x6 SR 3 0.80±0.10 (8±1)
Shoulder screw 2 0.80±0.10 (8±1)
PF upper cover ASSY Taptite cup B M3x10 2 0.60±0.10 (6±1)
Registration front/rear sensor Taptite cup B M3x8 1 0.55±0.05 (5.5±0.5)
PCB ASSY
Front chute ASSY Taptite cup B M3x10 2 0.60±0.10 (6±1)
Cleaner PF gear cover Taptite bind B M4x12 5 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
PF registration solenoid Taptite bind B M3x10 1 0.55±0.10 (5.5±1)
Pick-up solenoid Taptite bind B M3x10 1 0.55±0.10 (5.5±1)
Fuser/eject drive motor Taptite bind B M4x12 1 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
Eject gear cover Taptite bind B M4x12 2 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
Paper eject guide ASSY Taptite bind B M4x12 4 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
Belt drive ASSY Taptite pan (washer) 3 0.70±0.10 (7±1)
B M4x12DA
Drum motor origin sensor Taptite bind B M3x10 1 0.55±0.10 (5.5±1)
PCB ASSY
Safety louver Taptite bind B M4x12 1 0.80±0.10 (8±1)
FG harness Screw pan (S/P washer) M4x8 1 0.80±0.10 (8±1)
DB
LVPS unit Taptite bind B M4x12 2 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
LVPS plate Taptite pan (washer) 4 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
B M4x12DA
Low-voltage power supply Taptite pan (washer) 1 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
PCB ASSY, LVPS inner plate B M4x12DA
Registration sensor holder ASSY Taptite cup S M3x6 SR 1 0.50±0.10 (5±1)
High-voltage power supply Taptite bind B M4x12 2 0.70±0.10 (7±1)
PCB ASSY
Taptite pan (washer) 2 0.65±0.10 (6.5±1)
B M4x12DA
HVPS ground plate 2 Taptite cup S M3x6 SR 1 0.80±0.10 (8±1)
HVPS control PCB ASSY Taptite pan (S/P W) B M3x10 1 0.40±0.05 (4±0.5)
Develop release sensor PCB Taptite cup B M3x8 1 0.40±0.05 (4±0.5)
ASSY
Side frame R Shoulder screw M3 4 0.80±0.10 (8±1)
Side frame L Shoulder screw M3 3 0.80±0.10 (8±1)
Bevel gear cover Taptite bind B M4x12 3 0.90±0.10 (9±1)
5-4 Confidential
4. LUBRICATION
The kind of the lubricating oil

Lubrication point Quantity of lubrication
(Maker name)
MOLYKOTE PG-661 (W) Belt drive gear 2 mm dia. ball PG2

(Dow Corning)
LED ASSY 1 mm dia. ball PG1
FLOIL BG-MU (Kanto Kasei) Belt drive gear 2 mm dia. ball BG2
MOLYKOTE EM-D110 Separation pad ASSY 2 mm dia. ball EM2

(Dow Corning)
Paper tray 2 mm dia. ball EM2
2 places
PG2
Belt drive gear
16 places
BG2
* Around the center
of tooth width
8 places
BG2
* Around one third from
the tip of the tooth width
Belt drive motor
Belt drive plate
PG2: MOLYKOTE PG-661 (W) (2 mm dia. ball)

BG2: FLOIL BG-MU (2 mm dia. ball)
4 places Separation pad ASSY

EM2
Paper tray
EM2: MOLYKOTE EM-D110 (2 mm dia. ball)
5-5 Confidential
Paper tray
2 places (one for each to the right and left)

EM2
EM2: MOLYKOTE EM-D110 (2 mm dia. ball)
1 place
PG1
LED ASSY
PG1: MOLYKOTE PG-661 (W) (1 mm dia. ball)
5-6 Confidential
5. OVERVIEW OF GEARS
When ordering spare parts, please refer to Parts reference list.
■ Develop drive
<Development view>
Drum develop drive unit Side frame L
4
1 <Left side>
6
5
<Layout view>
7 8
6
3 5
4
2
Develop drive
1 plate ASSY
Drum develop drive unit
<Name of gears>
1 LU5128 Idle gear 100 5 LU5126 Idle gear 30
2 LU5127 Gear 63/85 6 LU5126 Idle gear 30
3 LU5124 Pendulum gear 50 7 LU5143 Gear 42/39
4 LU5125 Idle gear 35 8 LU5143 Gear 42/39
* These parts are subject to change without notice.
5-7 Confidential
■ Drum develop drive
<Development view>
17 21
18
13 14 16
20
11
19
15
10
12
<Layout view>
11 16
10 14 18 21
9 13 17 20
12 15 19
<Name of gears>
9 LU5139 Drum drive gear ASSY 16 LU5136 Coupling idle gear 35
10 LU5132 Develop coupling gear 17 LU6157 Drum drive gear 60
11 LU5136 Coupling idle gear 35 18 LU5132 Develop coupling gear
12 LU6158 Drum idle gear 30 19 LU6158 Drum idle gear 30
13 LU6157 Drum drive gear 60 20 LU6157 Drum drive gear 60
14 LU5132 Develop coupling gear 21 LU5132 Develop coupling gear
15 LU6159 Drum drive gear 62/30
5-8 Confidential
■ Cleaner PF
<Development view>
Side frame L
23
24
22
29
25
27
31
26
28
32 36
38 30
33 39 <Left side>
34 37
35
<Layout view>
* Outside of side frame L
29
23 24 30 31
28
25
22 32 39
27 38
26 33
35
37
36
34
<Name of gears>
22 LU5108 Gear 70 31 LU5744 Registration differential gear
23 LU5110 Idle gear 25 R 32 LU5097 Gear 32/21
24 LU5110 Idle gear 25 R 33 LU5100 Gear 26-51
25 LU5112 Idle gear 25 SW 34 LU5101 Idle gear 40
26 LU5109 Idle gear 38 35 LU2043 Feeder gear 17/22
27 LU5111 Idle gear 25 36 LU5103 Pick-up sector gear 31/38
28 LU5161 Gear 27/72 37 LU5104 Pick-up sector gear spring
29 LU5069 Planetary clutch ASSY 38 LU5222 Feeder gear 17
30 LU5099 Pendulum gear 38 39 LU5223 PF drive gear 23
5-9 Confidential
■ PF drive
<Development view>
Side frame L
50
49
48
46
42
<Front> 47
43 40 45
44 41
<Layout view>
* Inside of side frame L
38
40
40
42
39
41
41
43 44
46
50
48
42
44 43
45 48
46
45
47
49
47
<Name of gears>
40 LR0910 Hook spring 46 LU5089 Planetary clutch ASSY
41 LU5093 LM hook B 47 LR0910 Hook spring
42 LU5094 LM hook C 48 LU5105 Worm Z33
43 LU5095 P/P gear 26 sector 49 LU5106 Bevel gear Z17G
44 LU6447 P/P gear 26 sector spring 50 LR0301 Bevel gear Z23G
45 LU5088 LM hook A
5-10 Confidential
6. HARNESS ROUTING
1 Top Cover Unit
Top cover sub ASSY
Boss
Hook
Hook
Top cover sub ASSY
Hook
A
Sub frame ASSY
A LED head control

PCB ASSY
Hook
LED main FFC film Front
Side frame L
Hole A LED power relay PCB ASSY
Slit
Front
Front
Main PCB ASSY
5-11 Confidential
2 Registration Front/Rear Sensor PCB ASSY
Side frame R
Front sensor PCB ASSY
Paper feed unit
Hook
Hole
HVPS control
PCB ASSY
3 Manual Sensor PCB ASSY
Side frame R
Front
sensor PCB ASSY
Hook
Hole
Slit
Hook
Hole
Front chute ASSY
Manual sensor PCB ASSY Hook
Front chute ASSY Manual sensor PCB ASSY
Paper feed unit
5-12 Confidential
4 PF Registration Solenoid, Pick-up Solenoid
Pick-up solenoid
Cleaner PF gear cover

PF registration
solenoid
Hook
A Front
Side frame L
Hook
Hook
Front
Side frame L
PF line holder
Hook
Hook
A Hook
Engine PCB ASSY
PF line holder Cleaner PF gear cover

Hook
5-13 Confidential
5 Belt Drive ASSY
Belt drive ASSY Engine insulation sheet
Hook
Engine PCB ASSY
Side frame L Hook Engine insulation sheet Front
6 Develop Release Motor ASSY

PF line holder Hook
Side frame L
Develop release
motor ASSY
Hook
Hook Hook
Front
Engine PCB ASSY
PF line holder
5-14 Confidential
7 Drum Motor Origin Sensor PCB ASSY
Drum motor origin sensor PCB ASSY Hook
Side frame L
Engine insulation
sheet
Hook
Engine PCB ASSY
Engine insulation
sheet
Hole Front
8 Fuser/Eject Drive Motor, Fuser/Eject Drive Motor Sensor

PCB ASSY
Fuser/eject drive motor
Eject gear cover Engine insulation sheet
sensor PCB ASSY
Front
Hook
Hook
Fuser/eject
drive motor
Side frame L
Hook Engine insulation sheet Engine PCB ASSY
5-15 Confidential
9 Toner/New Sensor PCB ASSY
Hook Toner/New sensor PCB ASSY
Guide Line holder M
Engine PCB ASSY
Hook
Hook
Hook
Hook
Line holder M
Line holder M
Engine PCB ASSY

Front Side frame L
10 Paper Feed Motor ASSY, Drum Drive Motor

Hook
Drum drive motor PF line holder
Line holder M
Hook
Hook
Paper feed
motor ASSY
Engine PCB ASSY Hook Hook Side frame L Front
PF line holder
5-16 Confidential
11 Control Panel Cover ASSY (Wireless LAN model only)
(USB Direct Interface Relay PCB ASSY)
Core Hook Control panel cover ASSY
Side frame L Hook
Main PCB ASSY
Control panel
Hook
A
cover ASSY
Main shield cover

plate ASSY
A view
Hook
USB direct
interface relay
Front PCB ASSY
<A view> Core Hook

Side frame L Front
Hook
Main shield cover plate ASSY Hook

Main PCB ASSY
5-17 Confidential
12 Control Panel Cover ASSY (Wireless LAN model only)
(Wireless LAN PCB ASSY, Panel PCB ASSY)
Hook
A Hook A
Control panel cover ASSY
Wireless LAN PCB ASSY
Panel PCB ASSY
Hook
Control panel
Panel harness cover ASSY
protective sheet
Side frame L Control panel cover ASSY

Hook
Main PCB ASSY
Hook
A view
Core
Hook
Front
<A view> Rib Hook

Front
Hook
Side frame L
Hook Hook
Main PCB ASSY Core
5-18 Confidential
13 Control Panel Cover ASSY (Wired network model only)
(Panel PCB ASSY)
<A view> Hook

Side frame L
Rib
Main PCB ASSY Hook Front
Guide A
Hook
Control panel
cover ASSY Control pane cover ASSYl
Guide
Panel PCB ASSY
Main PCB ASSY
Hook
Front
Side frame L
A view
Hook
5-19 Confidential
14 Eject Rear Sensor PCB ASSY
Slit
Hook Slit
Hook
Eject rear sensor
PCB ASSY
Eject rear sensor

PCB ASSY
Lower air duct

A
A Hook
Side frame L
Hole
Paper eject guide

Hole
Main PCB ASSY

Front
Side frame R
Front
15 Eject Front Sensor PCB ASSY

Side frame L Main PCB ASSY
Front
Eject front sensor

PCB ASSY
Front
Hook
Hole
A Side frame L
Fuser eject drive ASSY Belt drive ASSY
5-20 Confidential
16 Waste Toner Sensor
Hook
Waste toner sensor holder
Waste toner sensor
Waste toner sensor
Side frame R
Side frame R
Wire cover 2
Front
Front
A
Hole
Side frame R
A
HVPS control PCB ASSY
Hook
5-21 Confidential
17 Main Fan ASSY, LV Fan ASSY
Front Side frame R
Hook Main fan ASSY
Hook
Hook
LV fan ASSY
High-voltage power supply

PCB ASSY
18 Develop Release Sensor PCB ASSY, Top Cover Open Switch,

Toner LED PCB ASSY
Top cover open switch
Toner LED PCB ASSY
Hook
Hook
Hook
Develop release sensor
PCB ASSY
Side frame R
Front
5-22 Confidential
19 Registration Sensor Holder ASSY
Hole
Front Side frame L
Hook
Hole
Side frame L
A
Hole
Hook
Registration mark
relay PCB ASSY
Front
5-23 Confidential
20 Low-voltage Power Supply PCB ASSY
Eject gear cover Hook

Front Side frame L
Main PCB ASSY
Front
A
Side frame L Hook Engine PCB
ASSY
Hole
LVPS cover Engine insulation
sheet Hole
Low-voltage power supply PCB ASSY
21 Back Cover Sensor

Side frame L
A view
<A view>
Side frame L
Hook Main PCB ASSY
Hook
Slit
Front Back cover sensor

Front
Back cover sensor
5-24 Confidential
22 HVPS Control PCB ASSY
Side frame R
Hook
Main PCB ASSY A view
Hook
Hook
Engine PCB ASSY Hook
Front
Front cover top ASSY
Side frame L
Rib Hook <A view> A

Main PCB ASSY Side frame L
Side frame R
Hook Hook
HVPS control
PCB ASSY
Engine PCB ASSY Front Front
5-25 Confidential
7. DISASSEMBLY FLOW
Disassembly/Re-Assembly (second)
8.19 20s/20s 8.20 10s/10s 8.8 30s/30s 8.9 15s/15s

Arm Guide L Side Cover L Side Cover R
TC Arm Spring L
Cover ASSY/ ASSY A
Access Cover
B 8.10 45s/45s 8.55 25s/20s 8.56 10s/10s

8.21 45s/50s 8.47 10s/10s Control Panel
Top Cover Sub Cover ASSY
LV Fan ASSY C Main Fan ASSY
Top Cover Arm L
ASSY
A
8.12 15s/15s 8.17 40s/40s 8.11 20s/20s 8.15 15s/15s
8.22 15s/15s 8.48 60s/40s Wireless LAN USB Direct
Panel PCB ASSY Front Cover PCB ASSY Interface Relay
Inner Chute 2 Air Filter Holder
ASSY/ (Wireless LAN PCB ASSY
ASSY (Wireless LAN
Ozone Filter model only)
model only)
8.23 85s/90s 8.49 10s/10s

Paper Eject Rear 8.13 5s/5s 8.14 30s/30s 8.16 5s/5s
FFC Harness:
MAIN-LED CTL Actuator/ Rubber Key LCD/ 8.59 40s/40s
Paper Eject Rear Panel Light Guide High-voltage
Printed ASSY Back Light Film
Actuator Spring/ Power Supply
Paper Eject Rear PCB ASSY
8.24 5s/5s Actuator Top
8.28 15s/15s
LED Power Relay
PCB ASSY Develop Release 8.60 25s/25s
8.50 10s/10s Motor ASSY HVPS Control
Eject Rear Sensor PCB ASSY
8.25 40s/40s PCB ASSY
8.29 50s/55s
LED Head Control
PCB ASSY C Main PCB ASSY
8.61 25s/25s
8.57 100s/100s Waste Toner
8.26 75s/75s Low-voltage Sensor
LED ASSY/ Power Supply 8.30 40s/45s
Holder Hook PCB ASSY
Engine PCB ASSY
8.62 5s/5s
8.58 30s/30s Develop Release
Registration Sensor PCB ASSY
8.27 20s/20s 8.31 10s/15s
Sensor Holder 8.34 20s/25s Main PCB
Z Spring L/ ASSY
Z Spring R Registration Mark Insulation Sheet/
Relay PCB ASSY Engine Insulation
Sheet 8.63 80s/100s
Belt Cleaner
8.35 70s/75s Spring
Drum Develop 8.32 15s/15s 8.33 10s/10s
Drive Unit Main PCB Shield Engine Shield
8.5 5s/5s Plate Plate
8.64 30s/40s
Fuser Cover
8.45 20s/20s
TR Head Spring
Fuser/Eject Drive
Motor Sensor
8.6 10s/15s 8.7 50s/45s PCB ASSY
Paper Eject Front 8.65 50s/45s
Fuser Unit
Actuator 8.44 15s/15s 8.53 15s/15s
Side Frame R
Fuser/Eject Drive
Motor Belt Drive ASSY
B
8.51 10s/25s 8.66 30s/30s
Eject Front Sensor 8.52 30s/30s 8.54 10s/10s Toner LED PCB
PCB ASSY Toner/New Sensor Drum Motor Origin ASSY/
PCB ASSY Sensor PCB ASSY LED Holder
8.1 10s/10s
Support Flap
8.41 40s/40s 8.37 15s/15s 8.36 15s/15s
Pick-up Sector Paper Feed Motor Develop Drive
8.2 15s/30s Gear Spring/ ASSY Motor
Friction Spring
Roller Holder
ASSY
8.42 15s/25s
8.38 60s/60s
PF Registration
8.3 5s/10s Solenoid Paper Feed Unit 8.19 20s/20s
Separation Pad
ASSY TC Arm Spring R
8.43 20s/35s
Pick-up Solenoid/
8.4 15s/15s Pick-up Solenoid 8.39 25s/25s 8.40 30s/30s
Back Cover/ Lever Spring Registration Manual Sensor 8.46 10s/10s
Back Cover Front/Rear Sensor PCB ASSY
Stopper L/R PCB ASSY Top Cover Arm R
8.67 50s/55s
8.18 5s/5s LM Hook B/
LM Hook C/
Manual Feed Hook Spring BC10
Slot ASSY
5-26 Confidential
8. DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE
■ Preparation
Prior to proceeding with the disassembly procedure,
(1) Unplug
- the AC cord,
- the USB cable, if connected,
- the LAN cable, if connected, and
- the USB cable for PictBridge or USB flash memory drive, if connected.
(2) Remove
- the Paper tray,
- the Toner cartridge,
- the Drum unit,
- the Belt unit, and
- the Waste toner box.
Toner cartridge, Drum unit
Belt unit
Waste toner box
Paper tray
5-27 Confidential
8.1 Support Flap
(1) Release the two Bosses to remove the Support flap from the Top cover sub ASSY.
Boss
Boss
Support flap
Top cover sub ASSY
Fig. 5-1
5-28 Confidential
8.2 Roller Holder ASSY
(1) Push the Lift arm to the back and remove “B” of the Roller holder ASSY from “A” of the Lift
arm, and the Roller holder ASSY rotates in the direction of the arrow 1b.
“A”
Roller holder ASSY
1a “B”
Paper feed unit
Lift arm
1a
1b
“B” Roller holder

ASSY
“A”
Lift arm 1b
Paper feed unit
< Front>
Fig. 5-2
(2) Slide the Roller holder ASSY in the direction of the arrow 2 and remove it from “C” of the
Paper feed unit.
(3) Slide the Roller holder ASSY in the direction of the arrows 3a and 3b in this order and
remove it from the Paper feed unit.
Paper feed unit
“C”
2 3a
3b
Roller holder ASSY
Fig. 5-3
5-29 Confidential
Assembling Note:
When assembling the Roller holder ASSY onto the Paper feed unit, make sure to align the
Shaft of the Roller holder ASSY with the Hole of the Paper feed unit, and then insert it into
the Hole.
Paper feed unit
Paper feed unit
Roller holder ASSY

Shaft
Hole
Fig. 5-4
5-30 Confidential
8.3 Separation Pad ASSY
(1) Release the two Hooks of the Separation pad ASSY from the Paper tray.
(2) Release the two Pins to remove the Separation pad ASSY from the Paper tray.
Hook
Separation pad ASSY
Pin Hook
Pin
2b
Paper tray
2a
Pad spring
Fig. 5-5
(3) Remove the Pad spring from the Paper tray.

Note:
Be careful not to loose the Pad spring.
Pad spring
Paper tray
Fig. 5-6
5-31 Confidential
Assembling Note:
Make sure to assemble the Separation pad ASSY in a way that the “A” of the
Separation pad ASSY fits into the “B” of the Pad spring.
"A"
Separation pad ASSY
"B"
Pad spring
Fig. 5-7
5-32 Confidential
8.4 Back Cover/Back Cover Stopper L/R
(1) Open the Back cover.
Back cover
<Back side>
Fig. 5-8
(2) Remove the Hook and then remove Back cover stopper L and R from the Main body.
Main body
Hook
Back cover

<Back side>
Fig. 5-9
5-33 Confidential
(3) Remove the Bush of the Back cover from the Shaft at the right side of the Main body.
Bush
Main body
3a
3b
Shaft
<Right side>
Shaft
3c
Back cover
Bush <Back side>
Fig. 5-10
(4) Remove the Back cover from the Shaft at the left side of the Main body.
Main body
<Left side>
Shaft
Back cover
Fig. 5-11
5-34 Confidential
(5) Remove the Back cover stopper L and R from the Back cover.

(Black)
5b
Back cover
5a
Back cover stopper

5b
Back cover
(White)
Fig. 5-12
5-35 Confidential
8.5 Fuser Cover
(1) Release of the Fuser cover lock lever L and R and open the Fuser cover.
1a
1b Fuser cover lock lever L
Fuser cover
1a

<Back side>
Fig. 5-13
(2) Remove the left Shaft of the Fuser cover from the Notch on the Bush of the Side frame L.
(3) Remove the right Shaft of the Fuser cover from the Bush of the LVPS cover.
Side frame L
Notch on bush
3a
Left shaft
LVPS cover
3b
Bush
Fuser cover
Right shaft <Back side>
Fig. 5-14
5-36 Confidential
8.6 Paper Eject Front Actuator
(1) Release the Hook and slide the Paper eject front actuator in the direction of arrows 1a
and 1b in this order.
<Left side>
1b
1a
Fuser cover
Hook
Fig. 5-15
(2) Align the “A” and “B” of the Paper eject front actuator with the “C” and “D” of the Fuser
cover respectively, and remove the Paper eject front actuator.
* Top view of the Fuser cover
"C"
Paper eject front
actuator
Fuser cover
"A"
"D" Paper eject front actuator "C"

<Left side>
"B"
Fuser cover
"D"
Fig. 5-16
5-37 Confidential
(3) Remove the Paper eject front actuator spring from the Paper eject front actuator.
Paper eject front actuator spring
Fig. 5-17
Assembling Note:
- When assembling the Paper eject front actuator, assemble the Paper eject front actuator
spring as shown in the figure below.
- Check that the Paper eject front actuator is moved smoothly.
Paper eject front actuator spring
Fuser cover
Fig. 5-18
5-38 Confidential
8.7 Fuser Unit
(1) Remove the Taptite bind B M3x12 screw, and then remove the Fuser cover L from the
Fuser unit.
Fuser cover L
Fuser unit
<Back side>
Fig. 5-19
(2) Remove the Taptite bind B M3x12 screw, and then remove the Fuser cover R from the
Fuser unit.
Fuser cover R
Fuser unit
<Back side>
Fig. 5-20
5-39 Confidential
(3) Disconnect the two Connectors (CN1, CN3) from the Eject front sensor PCB ASSY.
Connector
Connector
CN3
CN1
CN1 <Back side>

CN3
Fig. 5-21
(4) Disconnect the two Electrode terminals from the Fuser unit.
Fuser unit
<Back side>
Fig. 5-22
5-40 Confidential
(5) Remove the two Taptite pan B M4x14 screws, and then remove the Fuser unit from the
Main body as holding the “A.”
Main body
Taptite pan B M4x14
"A"
Pressure roller ASSY

Fuser unit
Taptite pan B M4x14
<Back side>
Fig. 5-23
Note:
- Do not apply a physical impact or vibration to the Fuser unit.
- Do not touch the roller and electrodes as shown in the figure below to prevent
breakage of the Fuser unit.
Fuser unit Fuser unit
Fig. 5-24
5-41 Confidential
Assembling Note:
The Fuser unit for replacement is transported while the pressure roller is held lightly to
prevent deformation of the pressure roller. When assembling the Fuser unit, make sure to
assemble the Fuser unit to the product first, and then remove the Spacer in the direction of
the arrow from the Fuser unit.
Spacer
Fuser unit
Spacer
Fig. 5-25
5-42 Confidential
8.8 Side Cover L ASSY/Access Cover
(1) Open the Top cover unit.
Top cover unit
Fig. 5-26
5-43 Confidential
(2) Remove the two Taptite bind B M4x12 screws from the Side cover L ASSY.
(3) Release the two Hooks and two Bosses on the upper side and five Hooks on the bottom,
and then remove the Side cover L ASSY from the Main body.
3a

Boss
Hook
Hook
3b
Boss
Side cover L ASSY Main body
<Left side>
* Inside of Side cover L ASSY

Hook
Side cover L ASSY
<Back side>
<Front>
Hook
Hook
Fig. 5-27
5-44 Confidential
Assembling Note:
When assembling the Side cover L ASSY onto the Main body, make sure to push the three
Hooks of the Front cover into the three “A” of the Side cover L ASSY.
Front cover
Side cover L ASSY
Hook
"A"
<Left side>
Fig. 5-28
(4) Remove the Access cover from the Side cover L ASSY.
Access cover
4a
Side cover L ASSY
4b
Fig. 5-29
5-45 Confidential
8.9 Side Cover R ASSY
(1) Remove the two Taptite bind B M4x12 screws from the Side cover R ASSY.
(2) Release the two Hooks and two Bosses on the upper side and five Hooks on the bottom,
and then remove the Side cover R ASSY from the Main body.
Boss
Boss
Hook

Main body
Side cover R ASSY

<Right side>
* Inside of Side cover R ASSY

Hook
Side cover R ASSY
<Back side> <Front>
Hook Hook
Fig. 5-30
5-46 Confidential
Assembling Note:
When assembling the Side cover R ASSY onto the Main body, make sure to push the three
Hooks of the Front cover into the three “A” of the Side cover R ASSY.
Front cover
"A"
Hook
Side cover R ASSY
<Right side>
Fig. 5-31
5-47 Confidential
8.10 Control Panel Cover ASSY
(1) Remove the four Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screws and LED FG harness ASSY.
(2) Release the three Hooks to remove the Main shield cover plate ASSY from the Main body.
Hook
Main body
LED FG harness ASSY
Hook
Taptite cup S M3x6 SR
Main shield cover plate ASSY

<Left side>
Hook
Fig. 5-32
Note:
After removing the Main shield cover plate ASSY, do not set up the main body with the left
side down. The machine may get damaged due to load applied to the paper feed motor.
(3) Disconnect the three Connectors (CN1, CN2, CN3) and cables from the Main PCB ASSY.
(CN1, CN2: Wireless LAN model only)
Main PCB ASSY
CN14 CN10 CN9 CN4
CN1
CN19 CN2
CN3
CN18
CN5
CN13 CN12 CN11
Fig. 5-33
5-48 Confidential
(4) Remove the two Taptite bind B M4x12 screws and five front Hooks, and slowly lift the
Control panel cover ASSY to the direction of 4a, and then remove it from the Main body.
Hook
Hook
Hook 4b
4a
Main body
Fig. 5-34
Harness routing: Refer to “ , Control Panel Cover ASSY (Wireless LAN model only).”
Refer to “ Control Panel Cover ASSY (Wired network model only).”
5-49 Confidential
8.11 Wireless LAN PCB ASSY (Wireless LAN model only)
(1) Disconnect the all cables in the USB holder.
(2) Release the Hook and hold up the Wireless LAN PCB ASSY slightly in the direction of the
arrow 2.
(3) Turn over the Panel harness protective sheet in the direction of the arrow 3.
(4) Remove the Wireless LAN PCB ASSY from the Control panel cover ASSY.
2
Panel harness
protective sheet
3
Hook
Fig. 5-35
(5) Remove the Panel harness protective sheet from the Control panel cover ASSY.
Panel harness protective sheet
Fig. 5-36
5-50 Confidential
(6) Disconnect the connector of the WLAN-MAIN harness ASSY from the Wireless LAN PCB
ASSY.
WLAN-MAIN harness ASSY
Fig. 5-37
Harness routing: Refer to “ Control Panel Cover ASSY (Wireless LAN model only)
(Wireless LAN PCB ASSY, Panel PCB ASSY) .”
5-51 Confidential
8.12 Panel PCB ASSY
(1) Release the three Hooks to remove the Panel PCB ASSY from the Control panel cover ASSY.
Note:
Be careful that the Flat cable of the LCD is connected to the Panel PCB ASSY.
Flat cable
Panel PCB ASSY
Hook
Fig. 5-38
(2) Release the Lock and disconnect the Flat cable (CN1) from the Panel PCB ASSY.
Note:
- After disconnecting the flat cable(s), check that each cable is not damaged at its end
or short-circuited.
- When connecting the flat cable(s), do not insert it at an angle. After insertion, check
that the cable is not at an angle.
CN1
Panel PCB ASSY
Lock
Flat cable
Fig. 5-39
Harness routing: Refer to “ Control Panel Cover ASSY (Wireless LAN model only).”
Refer to “ Control Panel Cover ASSY (Wired network model only).”
5-52 Confidential
8.13 Rubber Key Printed ASSY
(1) Remove the Rubber key printed ASSY from the Control panel cover ASSY.
Rubber key printed ASSY
Fig. 5-40
5-53 Confidential
8.14 LCD/Back Light Film
<Wireless LAN model>
(1) Release the two Hooks to remove the LCD holder from the Control panel cover ASSY.
LCD holder Hook
Hook
Fig. 5-41
(2) Release the two Hooks to remove the LCD and Back light film from the LCD holder.
LCD
Back light film

Hook
Hook
LCD holder
Fig. 5-42
5-54 Confidential
<Wired network model>
(1) Release the two Hooks to remove the LCD from the Control panel cover ASSY.
LCD
Fig. 5-43
5-55 Confidential
8.15 USB Direct Interface Relay PCB ASSY
(1) Remove the two Taptite bind B M3x8 screws and FG harness.
(2) Remove the USB direct interface relay PCB ASSY from the Control panel cover ASSY.
FG harness
USB direct interface relay Taptite bind B M3x8

PCB ASSY
Fig. 5-44
(3) Disconnect the Connector of the USB A-MAIN relay harness ASSY from the USB direct
interface relay PCB ASSY.
USB direct interface relay PCB ASSY
USB A-MAIN relay harness ASSY
Fig. 5-45
Harness routing: Refer to “ Control Panel Cover ASSY (Wireless LAN model only) (USB
Direct Interface Relay PCB ASSY).”
5-56 Confidential
8.16 Panel Light Guide
(1) Remove the Panel light guide from the Control panel cover ASSY.
Panel light guide
Fig. 5-46
(2) Remove the two Taptite bind B M3x8 screws, and then remove the USB holder from the
Control panel cover ASSY.
Taptite bind B M3x8
USB holder
Fig. 5-47
5-57 Confidential
8.17 Front Cover
(1) Disconnect the Connector (CN4) from the Main PCB ASSY.
Main PCB ASSY
CN14 CN10 CN9 CN4
CN1
CN19 CN2
CN3
CN18
CN5
CN13 CN12 CN11
Fig. 5-48
(2) Disconnect the Connector (CN13) and cables from the Engine PCB ASSY.
Engine PCB ASSY
CN13 CN14 CN15
CN1
CN11
CN2
CN10
CN3
CN9
CN8 CN7 CN6 CN5 CN4
Fig. 5-49
5-58 Confidential
(3) Remove the two Taptite bind B M4x12 screws from the Front cover.
(4) Release the six Hooks and two Bosses to remove the Front cover from the Main body.
(5) Remove the two FG plate from the Front cover.
Main body
FG plate
Boss
Boss
FG plate

Hook
Front cover
<Front>
Fig. 5-50
5-59 Confidential
8.18 Manual Feed Slot ASSY
(1) Release the two Bosses to remove the Manual feed slot ASSY from the Front cover.
Boss
Manual feed slot ASSY
Boss
Front cover
Fig. 5-51
5-60 Confidential
8.19 TC Arm Spring
(1) Disconnect the FFC harness:MAIN-LED CTL (CN14) from the Main PCB ASSY.
Note:
or short-circuited.
Main PCB ASSY
CN14 CN10 CN9 CN4
CN1
CN19 CN2
CN3
CN18
CN5
CN13 CN12 CN11
Fig. 5-52
(2) Release the Hook to remove the LED power relay PCB ASSY from the Side frame L.
Top cover unit
Hook
LED power relay PCB

ASSY
Side frame L
<Left side>
Fig. 5-53
5-61 Confidential
(3) Disconnect the Connector from the LED power relay PCB ASSY.
Connector
LED power relay PCB ASSY
Fig. 5-54
(4) Remove the Relay-LED harness ASSY of the Top cover unit and FFC harness:MAIN-LED
CTL from the Side frame L.
Note:
or short-circuited.
Top cover unit
FFC harness:MAIN-LED CTL
Relay-LED harness ASSY
LED FG harness ASSY
Side frame L
Fig. 5-55
Harness routing: Refer to “ Top Cover Unit.”
5-62 Confidential
(5) Remove the TC arm spring L from the Top cover arm L.
TC arm spring L
Hook
Top cover arm L
<Left side> Hook
Fig. 5-56
Assembling Note:
The TC arm spring L and TC arm spring R are different parts. Make sure to assemble the
spring with a red line on its side to the L side.
Red line
TC arm spring R
TC arm spring L
Fig. 5-57
5-63 Confidential
(6) Remove the TC arm spring R from the Top cover arm R.
TC arm spring R
Hook
Hook
Top cover arm R
<Right side>
Fig. 5-58
5-64 Confidential
8.20 Arm Guide L Cover
(1) Remove the Arm guide L cover from the Arm guide L.
<A view>
Arm guide L Top cover unit
Boss
Arm guide L cover
Boss
A view
Arm guide L cover
<Left side>
Fig. 5-59
5-65 Confidential
8.21 Top Cover Sub ASSY
(1) Remove the Pin of the Top cover arm L from the “A” of the Arm guide L.
Top cover unit
"A"
Pin
Arm guide L
Top cover arm L
Arm guide L
Top cover arm L

<Left side>
Fig. 5-60
(2) Remove the Pin of the Top cover arm R from the “B” of the Arm guide R.
Arm guide R
Arm guide R "B"
Top cover unit
Pin
Top cover arm R
Top cover arm R

<Right side>
Fig. 5-61
5-66 Confidential
Assembling Note:
When assembling the Arm guide R onto the Top cover arm R, make sure to follow the
procedure described below.
1) Slide the Link push arm to the rearmost and insert Pin A of the Top cover arm R to “C”
of the link push arm.
“C”
Arm guide R
Link push arm R
Pin A
Top cover arm R
Link push arm R
Top cover unit
Fig. 5-62
2) Be sure to mount it by inserting Pin B of the top cover arm R into “B” of the arm guide R.
Top cover unit

Arm guide R “B”
Pin B
Arm guide R
Top cover arm R
Top cover arm R
Fig. 5-63
5-67 Confidential
(3) Remove the Top cover sub ASSY from the Main body.
Top cover sub ASSY
3b
3a
Top cover sub ASSY
3a Shaft part of main body
Main body
Fig. 5-64
5-68 Confidential
8.22 Inner Chute 2 ASSY
(1) Remove the two Taptite bind B M4x12 screws from the Inner chute 2 ASSY.
(2) Release the two Bosses to remove the Inner chute 2 ASSY from the Top cover sub ASSY.
Inner chute 2 ASSY
Boss
Boss
Top cover sub ASSY
Fig. 5-65
Assembling Note:
When assembling the Inner chute 2 ASSY, make sure to assemble it in a way that the two
"A" of the Top cover sub ASSY come above the Inner chute 2 ASSY.
Top cover sub ASSY

"A"
Inner chute 2 ASSY
Fig. 5-66
5-69 Confidential
8.23 FFC Harness:MAIN-LED CTL
(1) Remove the two Taptite bind B M4x12 screws, and then remove the Arm guide L from the
Top cover sub ASSY.
Arm guide L
Top cover sub ASSY
Fig. 5-67
(2) Remove the Taptite bind B M4x12 screw, and then remove the TC harness cover from the
Top cover sub ASSY.
TC harness cover
Top cover sub ASSY
Fig. 5-68
5-70 Confidential
(3) Remove the two Taptite bind B M4x12 screws, and then remove the Arm guide R from
the Top cover sub ASSY.
Arm guide R
Top cover sub ASSY
Fig. 5-69
(4) Remove the three Taptite bind B M4x12 screws, and then remove the Sub frame ASSY
from the Top cover sub ASSY.
Sub frame ASSY
Top cover sub ASSY
Fig. 5-70
5-71 Confidential
(5) Insert the two “A” of the removed Sub frame ASSY into the two “B” of the Main body and
close it as shown in the figure below.
Sub frame ASSY
"A"
"B"
"A" 5a
Main body
"B" 5b
Fig. 5-71
5-72 Confidential
(6) Remove the four Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screws, and then remove the LED PCB cover
and Insulation sheet B from the Sub frame ASSY.
Insulation sheet B
LED PCB cover
Sub frame ASSY
Fig. 5-72
(7) Disconnect the FFC harness:MAIN-LED CTL (CN5) from the LED head control PCB ASSY.
Note:
or short-circuited.
Lock
LED head control PCB ASSY
Lock
CN5
Fig. 5-73
5-73 Confidential
Assembling Note:
After assembling the FFC harness:MAIN-LED CTL, be sure to pass the FFC harness:
MAIN-LED CTL through the notch on the LED main FFC film.
LED MAIN FFC film
Notch
Fig. 5-74
5-74 Confidential
8.24 LED Power Relay PCB ASSY
(1) Disconnect the Connector (CN6) of the LED power relay PCB ASSY from the LED head
control PCB ASSY.
CN6
LED power relay PCB ASSY
Fig. 5-75
5-75 Confidential
8.25 LED Head Control PCB ASSY
(1) Remove the LED FFC cover film from the Sub frame ASSY.
LED FFC cover film
Sub frame ASSY
Fig. 5-76
(2) Disconnect the four FFC sheet (CN1, CN2, CN3, CN4) of the LED ASSY from the LED
head control PCB ASSY.
Note:
or short-circuited.
Lock
Lock
(K) (Y) (M) (C)
CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Fig. 5-77
5-76 Confidential
(3) Remove the four Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screws, and then remove the LED head control
PCB ASSY from the Sub frame ASSY.

Sub frame ASSY
Fig. 5-78
5-77 Confidential
8.26 LED ASSY/Holder Hook
(1) Remove the four FFC sheet from the Sub frame ASSY, and remove the Cores from each
of the FFC sheet.
FFC sheet
FFC sheet
Core
Sub frame ASSY
Fig. 5-79
(2) Remove the Sub frame ASSY from the Main body, and place it with the LED ASSY side up.
Sub frame ASSY

LED ASSY
2a Main body
2b
Fig. 5-80
5-78 Confidential
(3) Release the Hook of the Holder hook at the left from the rear side of the LED ASSY using
a screwdriver to remove the Holder hook from the Holder and LED ASSY.
* <New holder> Holder hook
Hook
LED ASSY
Holder
3a Holder
Holder hook
Holder hook Holder
* <Old holder> 3c hook
3a 3b Hook
Hook
Holder
Hook Holder
Holder
hook
3b
Hook <Left side>
Holder Sub frame ASSY
Fig. 5-81
(4) Remove the Holder hook on the right side in the same way.
Holder hook
* <Old holder>
LED ASSY 4a
Holder
Hook
Holder
* <New holder>
Holder
hook Holder
hook
Hook
Hook
4b
4b 4c
Holder 4a Holder
Hook
Holder
hook
Holder Holder hook
4b Sub frame ASSY
<Right side>
Hook
Fig. 5-82
5-79 Confidential
* There are the old and new types of the Holder, and each type has a dedicated holder hook.
The new-type Holder hook cannot be assembled into the old-type Holder, and vice versa.
<Old holder hook> <New holder hook>
Part code: LU6238001 Color: Black Part code: LU6535001 Color: Gray
<Old holder> <New holder>
The shape has been changed.
Fig. 5-82-1
Assembling Note:
- When you assemble the Holder hook, make sure to insert the Hook A of the Holder hook
into the “A” of the LED ASSY first, and then assemble the Hook B of the Holder hook to
the Holder.
- After assembling, make sure to check that the Hook A is firmly engaged to the Holder.
If it is not engaged to the Holder firmly, it might cause an image failure.
Holder hook
LED ASSY
Hook A
LED ASSY Holder hook
“A”
Holder hook c Holder

Hook A * <Old holder>
* <New holder>
Holder
hook
Holder
Hook B
Hook B
b
b Holder
Holder
Hook B Holder hook
Fig. 5-83
5-80 Confidential
(5) Remove the LED ASSY from the Holder.
(6) Remove the other LED ASSYs in the same way as procedures (3) to (5) above.
LED ASSY
Holder
Sub frame ASSY
Fig. 5-84
Assembling Note:
- The LED parts of the LED ASSY for replacement are covered with protection tapes.
Make sure not to remove the protection tapes until assembling of the LED ASSY is
completed. After it is assembled, make sure to remove the protection tapes.
- If the LED parts get smeared, make sure to wipe smears on the LED parts with a clean
and soft cloth.
LED parts
LED ASSY
Fig. 5-85
5-81 Confidential
Assembling Note:
Since folding part of FFC sheet is different according to color of LED, make sure to fold FFC
sheet as shown in Fig. 5-86 and Fig. 5-87 before assembling LED ASSY.
<LED ASSY side>

There are lines on the side of LED ASSY of the FFC sheet. Make to fold FFC sheet along the
line in order to replace LED ASSY correctly.
FFC sheet
First (K), Forth (C)
LED ASSY
Second (Y), Third (M)
Fold up FFC along with the dotted line
Fig. 5-86
5-82 Confidential
<LED head control PCB ASSY side> (full-scale)
First (K)
126.1±1.0 mm
54.6±1.0 mm
43.0±1.0 mm
* Electrode side
105.6±1.0 mm
Second (Y)
136.0±1.0 mm
82.5±1.0 mm
* Electrode side
62.0±1.0 mm
116.6±1.0 mm
Third (M) 114.1±1.0 mm
63.6±1.0 mm
40.0±1.0 mm
* Electrode side
93.6±1.0 mm
64.6±1.0 mm
63.1±1.0 mm
26.6±1.0 mm
Forth (C) 20.0±1.0 mm
* Electrode
side
42.6±1.0 mm

Fold down FFC along with the solid line
Fig. 5-87
5-83 Confidential
(7) Insert a Screwdriver between the Earth plate L and LED ASSY to release the Hook A.
(8) Release the Hook B to remove the Earth plate L from the LED ASSY.
(9) Remove the Earth plate R in the same way.
LED ASSY
Earth plate L Hook A
LED ASSY
Hook A
Screwdriver
Hook B
Earth plate L
Hook B
Fig. 5-87-1
5-84 Confidential
Assembling Note:
- If the removed Earth plate L and Earth plate R are bent even a little, it will cause a
connection failure, and therefore they cannot be reused. Be sure to use the new Earth
plate L and Earth plate R when you assemble them.
- After assembling the Earth plate L and Earth plate R, be sure to check that they are firmly
engaged with the Hook A and Hook B, and not lifted from the LED ASSY.
(Refer to Fig. 5-87-2)
- The Hook of the Earth plate R must be firmly engaged with the Earth spring R.
(Refer to Fig. 5-87-3)
LED ASSY
LED ASSY
Earth plate R
Earth plate R
The Earth plate L and Earth plate R must not be lifted.
Fig. 5-87-2
Earth spring R Hook
Earth spring R
LED ASSY
Earth plate R
LED ASSY Earth plate R
Fig. 5-87-3
5-85 Confidential
(10) Release the four Hooks to remove the Earth spring L from the LED ASSY.
(11) Release the Hook to remove the Earth spring R from the LED ASSY.
Earth spring R LED ASSY
Earth spring R
Hole
LED ASSY
Earth spring L
Fig. 5-87-4
Assembling Note:
Check the points shown in the figure below.
LED ASSY Hook
Earth spring R Earth spring L
Earth spring L
Hook
Hook
LED ASSY The Earth spring L must not

ride on the LED ASSY.
Earth spring R Plate Earth spring L
The Earth spring R must be engaged The Earth spring L must be hooked
with the groove of the LED ASSY. on the notch of the Plate.
Fig. 5-87-5
5-86 Confidential
8.27 Z Spring L/Z Spring R
(1) Remove the Z spring L from the Holder of the Sub frame ASSY.
Z spring L
Holder
Hook
Sub frame ASSY
Fig. 5-88
Assembling Note:
When mounting the Z spring L, make sure to assemble them as shown in the figure below.
Spring of the main body

Hook
Z spring L
Z spring L
Holder
Hook
Holder
Spring of the main body
Sub frame ASSY
Fig. 5-89
5-87 Confidential
(2) Remove the Z spring R from the Holder of the Sub frame ASSY.
(3) Remove the Z spring L and R from the other three Holders with the aforementioned
procedures (1) and (2).
Z spring R
Sub frame ASSY

Holder
Fig. 5-90
Assembling Note:
When mounting the Z spring R, make sure to assemble them as shown in the figure below.
Hook Z spring R
Z spring R
Holder
Holder
Hook
Fig. 5-91
5-88 Confidential
8.28 Develop Release Motor ASSY
(1) Disconnect the Connector (CN5) from the Engine PCB ASSY.
Engine PCB ASSY
CN13 CN14 CN15
CN1
CN11
CN2
CN10
CN3
CN9
CN8 CN7 CN6 CN5 CN4
Fig. 5-92
(2) Remove the Taptite bind S M3x5 screw, and then remove the Develop release motor
ASSY from the Side frame L.
Develop release
motor ASSY
Side frame L
Taptite bind S M3x5
<Left side>
Fig. 5-93
Harness routing: Refer to “ Develop Release Motor ASSY.”
5-89 Confidential
Assembling Note:
- Make sure that the locking part of the Develop release motor ASSY is slid under the Hold
spring.
- When assembling the Develop release motor ASSY, make sure to tighten the screw after
rotating the Develop release motor ASSY until it stops rotating in the direction indicated
by the arrow.
Develop release motor ASSY

Side frame L
Side frame L
Hold spring
Hold spring Locking part of the bottom
Locking part of the bottom
Fig. 5-94
5-90 Confidential
8.29 Main PCB ASSY
(1) Disconnect the five Connectors (CN9, CN10, CN11, CN12, CN13) and one flat cable
(CN5) from the Main PCB ASSY.
Note:
or short-circuited.
Main PCB ASSY
CN14 CN10 CN9 CN4
CN1
CN19 CN2
CN3
CN18
CN5
CN13 CN12 CN11
Fig. 5-95
(2) Remove the three Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screws and one Taptite cup S M3x8 SR screw,
and then remove the Main PCB ASSY from the Main PCB shield plate.
Main PCB shield plate

Main PCB ASSY
2b
2a
2b
Main PCB shield plate 2a

<Left side>
Main PCB ASSY
Fig. 5-96
5-91 Confidential
8.30 Engine PCB ASSY
(1) Disconnect the eleven connectors (CN1, CN2, CN4, CN6, CN7, CN8, CN9, CN10, CN11,
CN14, CN15) and one flat cable (CN3) from the Engine PCB ASSY.
Note:
or short-circuited.
Engine PCB ASSY
CN13 CN14 CN15
CN1
CN11
CN2
CN10
CN3
CN9
CN8 CN7 CN6 CN5 CN4
Fig. 5-97
(2) Remove the four Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screws, and then remove the Engine PCB ASSY
from the Side frame L.
Side frame L

Engine PCB ASSY
<Left side>
Fig. 5-98
5-92 Confidential
8.31 Main PCB Insulation Sheet/Engine Insulation Sheet
(1) Remove the Main PCB insulation sheet from the Main PCB shield plate.
Main PCB insulation sheet
<Left side>
Fig. 5-99
(2) Remove the Engine insulation sheet from the Side frame L.
Side frame L
Engine insulation sheet
<Left side>
Fig. 5-100
5-93 Confidential
8.32 Main PCB Shield Plate
(1) Remove the three Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screws and one Taptite bind B M4x12 screw,
and then remove the Main PCB shield plate from the Side frame L.
Side frame L
Taptite cup S
Taptite bind B M4x12 M3x6 SR

<Left side>
Fig. 5-101
5-94 Confidential
8.33 Engine Shield Plate
(1) Remove the Taptite bind B M4x12 screw and Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screw, and then
remove the Engine shield plate from the Side frame L.
Side frame L
Engine shield plate
Taptite cup S M3x6 SR <Left side>
Fig. 5-102
5-95 Confidential
8.34 Registration Mark Relay PCB ASSY
(1) Remove the three Connectors (CN2, CN3, CN4) from the Registration mark relay PCB
ASSY.
Registration mark relay

PCB ASSY
CN2
CN4
<Left side>
CN3
Fig. 5-103
(2) Release the two Hooks to remove the Registration mark relay PCB ASSY from the Side
frame L.
Side frame L
Registration mark
relay PCB ASSY
Hook
<Left side>
Fig. 5-104
5-96 Confidential
8.35 Drum Develop Drive Unit
(1) Place the Main body upright as shown in the figure below.
Main body
Fig. 5-105
(2) Release the Hook to remove the Line holder front from the Develop drive plate ASSY.
Line holder front
Hook
Develop drive plate ASSY
Side frame L
Fig. 5-106
5-97 Confidential
(3) Release the Hook to remove the PF line holder from the Side frame L.
Hook
PF line holder
Side frame L
Fig. 5-107
(4) Release the two Hooks A on the upper side to remove the Line holder M from the Drum
develop drive unit.
Line holder M
Hook A
Hook
Fig. 5-108
5-98 Confidential
(5) Remove the two Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screws and two Taptite bind B M4x12 screws,
and then remove the Develop drive plate ASSY from the Side frame L.
Develop drive plate ASSY

Side frame L
Fig. 5-109
(6) Remove the one Gear 63/85, one Pendulum gear 50, one Idle gear 35,
two Idle gear 30 and two Gear 42/39 from the Side frame L.
Gear 42/39
Gear 63/85
Pendulum gear 50
Idle gear 30
Idle gear 35
Side frame L
Fig. 5-110
5-99 Confidential
(7) Remove the two Taptite bind B M4x12 screws, and then remove the Under bar from the
Main body.
Main body
Under bar
Fig. 5-111
(8) Remove the Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screw, and then remove the Under bar earth plate
from the Drum develop drive unit.
Under bar earth plate
Fig. 5-112
5-100 Confidential
(9) Remove the three Taptite bind B M4x12 screws and two Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screws,
and then remove the Drum develop drive unit from the Side frame L.

Pendulum gear bush
Side frame L
Fig. 5-113
Harness routing: Refer to “ Paper Feed Motor ASSY, Drum Drive Motor.”
(10) Remove the Pendulum gear bush from the Drum develop drive unit.
Pendulum gear bush
Fig. 5-114
5-101 Confidential
8.36 Develop Drive Motor
(1) Remove the three Screw bind M3x4, and then remove the Develop drive motor from the
Drum develop drive unit.
Develop drive motor
Screw bind M3x4
Fig. 5-115
5-102 Confidential
8.37 Paper Feed Motor ASSY
(1) Remove the three Screw bind M3x4, and then remove the Paper feed motor ASSY from
the Drum develop drive unit.
Paper feed motor ASSY
Screw bind M3x4
Fig. 5-116
Harness routing: Refer to “ Paper Feed Motor ASSY, Drum Drive Motor.”
Assembling Note:
When replacing the Paper feed motor ASSY with a new one, fold the FFC first in
accordance with the “How to Fold FFC of Paper Feed Motor ASSY” figure in the next page,
and then assemble the Paper feed motor ASSY.
5-103 Confidential
<How to Fold FFC of Paper Feed Motor ASSY> (full-scale)
Paper feed motor ASSY
35 mm
45 mm
10 mm
130 mm
45°
140 mm
85 mm
10 mm
45° Fold up FFC along with the dotted line
45°
Fig. 5-117
5-104 Confidential
8.38 Paper Feed Unit
(1) Remove the Bush cap and Gear 24/28 from the Side frame L.
Gear 24/28
Side frame L
<Left side> Bush cap
Fig. 5-118
(2) Release the Hook to remove the PF gear cap from the Side frame L.
PF gear cap
Side frame L
<Left side>
Hook
Fig. 5-119
5-105 Confidential
(3) Remove the PF gear 17 and Separation roller drive shaft from the Side frame L.
Separation roller drive shaft
Side frame L
PF gear 17 <Left side>
Fig. 5-120
Gear position: Refer to “ Cleaner PF.”
(4) Remove the PF drive gear 23 and PF roller drive shaft TR from the Side frame L.
PF roller drive shaft TR
Side frame L
PF drive gear 23 <Left side>
Fig. 5-121
Gear position: Refer to “ Cleaner PF.”
5-106 Confidential
(5) Disconnect the Connector (CN3) of the Registration front/rear sensor harness ASSY from
the HVPS control PCB ASSY.
Side frame R
Registration front/rear sensor

CN3 harness ASSY
<Right side>
Fig. 5-122
(6) Remove the three Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screws and two Shoulder screws, and then
remove the Paper feed unit from the Main body.
Main body
Shoulder screws
Paper feed unit Taptite cup S M3x6 SR
<Front>
Fig. 5-123
5-107 Confidential
8.39 Registration Front/Rear Sensor PCB ASSY
(1) Remove the two Taptite cup B M3x10 screws from the PF upper cover ASSY.
(2) Keep the shutter part of the Registration rear actuator at the position shown in the figure
below.
(3) Release the two Bosses to remove the PF upper cover ASSY from the Paper feed unit.
Note:
When removing the PF upper cover ASSY, be careful not to damage the Registration
rear actuator.
Taptite cup B M3x10

Registration rear
PF upper cover ASSY actuator
PF upper cover ASSY
Taptite cup B M3x10
Boss
Boss
Shutter part
Paper feed unit
Fig. 5-124
(4) Disconnect the Connector (CN2) of the Manual sensor harness ASSY from the
Registration front/rear sensor PCB ASSY.
Registration front/rear sensor PCB ASSY
Paper feed unit
CN2
Manual sensor
harness ASSY
Fig. 5-125
5-108 Confidential
(5) Remove the Taptite cup B M3x8 screw from the Registration front/rear sensor PCB ASSY.
(6) Keep the shutter part of the Registration front actuator at the position shown in the figure
below.
(7) Remove the Registration front/rear sensor PCB ASSY from the Paper feed frame.
Note:
When removing the Registration front/rear sensor PCB ASSY, be careful not to
damage the Registration front actuator.
Shutter part
Paper feed frame

Registration front/rear sensor
PCB ASSY
Taptite cup B M3x8
Fig. 5-126
Harness routing: Refer to “ Registration Front/Rear Sensor PCB ASSY.”
5-109 Confidential
8.40 Manual Sensor PCB ASSY
(1) Remove the two Taptite cup B M3x10 screws, and then remove the Front chute ASSY
from the Paper feed unit.
Paper feed unit

Taptite cup B M3x10
Front chute ASSY
Taptite cup B M3x10
Fig. 5-127
(2) Release the Hook to remove the Manual sensor PCB ASSY from the Front chute ASSY.
Manual sensor PCB ASSY
Hook
Front chute ASSY
Fig. 5-128
Harness routing: Refer to “ Manual Sensor PCB ASSY.”
5-110 Confidential
8.41 Pick-up Sector Gear Spring/Friction Spring
(1) Remove the Gear 27/72 from the Side frame L.
Gear 27/72
Side frame L
Fig. 5-129
(2) Remove the Pick-up sector gear spring from the Hook of the Cleaner PF gear cover.
Hook Cleaner PF gear cover
Pick-up sector gear spring
Fig. 5-130
5-111 Confidential
(3) Remove the five Taptite bind B M4x12 screws, and then remove the Cleaner PF gear
cover from the Side frame L.

Side frame L
Fig. 5-131
Assembling Note:
When assembling the Cleaner PF gear cover, make sure to place the Pick-up sector gear
spring and PF registration solenoid harness correctly as shown in the figure below.

PF registration solenoid
harness PF registration solenoid
harness
Side frame L
harness
Fig. 5-132
5-112 Confidential
(4) Remove the Friction spring from the Cleaner PF gear cover.
Friction spring
Fig. 5-133
(5) Remove the Pick-up sector gear spring from the Side frame L.
Side frame L
Fig. 5-134
5-113 Confidential
8.42 PF Registration Solenoid
(1) Remove the Pick-up sector gear 31/38 from the Side frame L.
Pick-up sector gear 31/38
Side frame L
Fig. 5-135
Assembling Note:
When assembling the Pick-up sector gear 31/38 onto the Side frame L, make sure to mount
the Pick-up solenoid lever as shown in the figure below.
Pick-up sector gear 31/38
Pick-up solenoid lever
Fig. 5-136
5-114 Confidential
(2) Remove the Taptite bind B M3x10 screw, and then remove the PF registration solenoid
Side frame L
Fig. 5-137
(3) Remove the Registration solenoid spring from the PF registration solenoid.
Registration solenoid spring
Fig. 5-138
Harness routing: Refer to “ PF Registration Solenoid, Pick-up Solenoid.”
5-115 Confidential
8.43 Pick-up Solenoid/Pick-up Solenoid Lever Spring
(1) Remove the Idle gear 40 from the Side frame L.
Idle gear 40
Side frame L
Fig. 5-139
(2) Remove the Pick-up solenoid lever spring from the Hook of the Pick-up solenoid lever.
(3) Remove the Pick-up solenoid lever spring from the Side frame L.
Note:
Be careful not to loose the Pick-up solenoid lever spring.
Pick-up solenoid lever spring
Hook
Side frame L
Pick-up solenoid Hook
Fig. 5-140
5-116 Confidential
(4) Remove the Taptite bind B M3x10 screw, and then remove the Pick-up solenoid and
Pick-up solenoid lever from the Side frame L.

Pick-up solenoid
Side frame L
Fig. 5-141
(5) Remove the Pick-up solenoid lever from the Pick-up solenoid.
Pick-up solenoid
Fig. 5-142
Harness routing: Refer to “ PF Registration Solenoid, Pick-up Solenoid.”
5-117 Confidential
8.44 Fuser/Eject Drive Motor
(1) Remove the Taptite bind B M4x12 screw and Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screw, and then
remove the Fuser/Eject drive motor from the Fuser eject drive ASSY.

Fuser/Eject drive motor
Fuser eject drive ASSY
Fig. 5-143
Harness routing: Refer to “ Fuser/Eject Drive Motor, Fuser/Eject Drive Motor Sensor PCB
ASSY.”
5-118 Confidential
8.45 Fuser/Eject Drive Motor Sensor PCB ASSY
(1) Remove the two Taptite bind B M4x12 screws, and then remove the Eject gear cover from
the Side frame L.
Hook
Taptite bind B M4x12 Eject gear cover
Hook
Side frame L
Fig. 5-144
Note:
Be careful when changing the setup condition of the main body with the left side up while
the Eject gear cover is removed because the gear may fall off.
(2) Release the Hook to remove the Fuser/eject drive motor sensor PCB ASSY from the
Eject gear cover.
Fuser/eject drive motor sensor PCB ASSY
2b Eject gear cover
2a
Hook
Fig. 5-145
Harness routing: Refer to “ Fuser/Eject Drive Motor, Fuser/Eject Drive Motor Sensor PCB
ASSY.”
5-119 Confidential
8.46 Top Cover Arm R
(1) Release the Hook to remove the TC arm pivot shaft from the Side frame R.
(2) Remove the Top cover arm R from the Side frame R.
<A view>
TC arm pivot shaft
Hook
Top cover arm R
1a
Top cover arm R A view
Side frame R
2
Side frame R
1b
1a
TC arm pivot shaft Hook
Fig. 5-146
5-120 Confidential
8.47 Top Cover Arm L
(1) Release the Hook to remove the TC arm pivot shaft from the Side frame L.
(2) Remove the Top cover arm L from the Side frame L.
Hook
<A view> TC arm pivot shaft

1b
1a
Top cover arm L
1a
2
Top cover arm L
Side frame L
A view
Fig. 5-147
Assembling Note:
When assembling the Top cover arm L, make sure to fit the “A” of the Top cover arm L into
the “B” of the Top cover link 1 before assembling the Top cover arm L onto the Side frame L.
"A"
Top cover arm L
Top cover link 1
"B"
Fig. 5-148
5-121 Confidential
8.48 Air Filter Holder ASSY/Ozone Filter
(1) Remove the two Taptite bind B M4x12 screws from the Paper eject guide ASSY.
(2) Remove the two Taptite bind B M4x12 screws from the Side frame L and Side frame R.

Side frame L
Taptite bind B M4x12 Side frame R
<Back side>
Fig. 5-149
(3) Open the left and right frames to the outside and remove the Paper eject guide ASSY
from the Main body.
3a
3b
3a
Side frame L
Side frame R <Back side>
Fig. 5-150
5-122 Confidential
(4) Release the two Hook A in the direction of the arrow 4a and remove the three Hook B in
the direction of the arrow 4b. Then, remove the Paper eject guide from the Lower air
duct.
Paper eject guide
Hook A
4c
4a
Lower air duct
4b
Hook A
Hook B
Fig. 5-151
Assembling Note:
When assembling the Paper eject guide onto the Lower air duct, make sure to pass the
Eject rear harness ASSY through the “A” of the Lower air duct before assembling it.
"A"
Eject rear sensor

PCB ASSY
Eject rear harness ASSY
Lower air duct
Fig. 5-152
5-123 Confidential
(5) Remove the Ozone filter from the Air filter holder ASSY.
Ozone filter
Air filter holder ASSY
Fig. 5-153
(6) Release the five Hooks to remove the Air filter holder ASSY from the Lower air duct.
Note:
When removing the Air filter holder ASSY from the Lower air duct, be careful not to
damage the Toner filter.
Hook
Hook
Air filter holder ASSY
Toner filter
Hook
Lower air duct
Fig. 5-154
5-124 Confidential
8.49 Paper Eject Rear Actuator/Paper Eject Rear Actuator
Spring/Paper Eject Rear Actuator Top
(1) Remove “A” of the Paper eject rear actuator spring from the Hook of the Paper eject rear
actuator.
(2) Turn the Paper eject rear actuator to the direction of the arrow 2a and slide it to the
direction of the arrow 2b.
Adjust “B” of the Paper eject rear actuator to the position of “C” of the Lower air duct.
Then, remove the Paper eject rear actuator from the Lower air duct.
“A”
Hook
Paper eject
Paper eject rear rear actuator
actuator spring
Lower air duct
1
2a
Shutter
2b
Paper eject
rear actuator
2a
Paper eject
rear actuator
Slit
Rib
“B”
2c
“C”
Lower air duct
Fig. 5-155
5-125 Confidential
(3) Remove the Paper eject rear actuator spring from the Paper eject rear actuator.
Paper eject rear actuator spring
Fig. 5-156
Assembling Note:
When assembling the Paper eject rear actuator spring, make sure to mount the Paper eject
rear actuator spring as shown in the figure below.
Paper eject rear actuator top Paper eject rear actuator
Paper eject rear actuator spring
Lower air duct
Fig. 5-157
5-126 Confidential
(4) Rotate the Paper eject rear actuator top in the direction of arrow 4a and remove the Paper
eject rear actuator top from the Paper eject rear actuator.
4a
4b
Paper eject rear actuator top
A view
Paper eject rear actuator <A view>
4b
4a
Paper eject rear
actuator top
Paper eject rear
actuator top
Fig. 5-158
5-127 Confidential
8.50 Eject Rear Sensor PCB ASSY
(1) Release the two Hooks to remove the Eject rear sensor PCB ASSY from the Lower air
duct.
Eject rear sensor PCB ASSY
Hook
Hook
Lower air duct
Fig. 5-159
Harness routing: Refer to “ Eject Rear Sensor PCB ASSY.”
5-128 Confidential
8.51 Eject Front Sensor PCB ASSY
(1) Release the Hook to remove the Eject front sensor PCB ASSY from the Side frame L.
Hook
Side frame L
<Back side>
Fig. 5-160
Harness routing: Refer to “ Eject Front Sensor PCB ASSY.”
5-129 Confidential
8.52 Toner/New Sensor PCB ASSY
(1) Release the five Hooks to remove the Toner/New sensor PCB ASSY from the Side frame L.
Hook
Side frame L
Toner/New sensor PCB ASSY
Fig. 5-161
(2) Release the Hooks of the PT sensor holder to remove the four PT sensor holder from the
Toner/New sensor PCB ASSY.
PT sensor holder
PT sensor holder
Hook
Hook
Hook
Toner/New sensor PCB ASSY
PT sensor holder
Fig. 5-162
Harness routing: Refer to “ Toner/New Sensor PCB ASSY.”
5-130 Confidential
8.53 Belt Drive ASSY
(1) Remove the three Taptite pan (washer) B M4x12DA screws, and then remove the Belt
drive ASSY from the Side frame L.
Side frame L
Taptite pan (washer)

B M4x12DA Belt drive ASSY
Fig. 5-163
Harness routing: Refer to “ Belt Drive ASSY.”
5-131 Confidential
8.54 Drum Motor Origin Sensor PCB ASSY
(1) Remove the Taptite bind B M3x10 screw, and then remove the Drum motor origin sensor
PCB ASSY from the Side frame L.
Side frame L
<Left side>
Drum motor origin

sensor PCB ASSY
Fig. 5-164
Harness routing: Refer to “ Drum Motor Origin Sensor PCB ASSY.”
5-132 Confidential
8.55 LV Fan ASSY
(1) Remove the Taptite bind B M4x12 screw from the Safety louver.
(2) Release the two Hooks to remove the Safety louver from the Side frame R.
Note:
Do not pull the Safety louver strongly because it has the Power supply switch on it.
Hook
Safety louver
Hook
Power supply switch

Side frame R
<Right side>
Fig. 5-165
(3) Disconnect the Connector (CN3) from the High-voltage power supply PCB ASSY.
Connector
CN3
High-voltage power supply

PCB ASSY
<Right side>
Fig. 5-166
5-133 Confidential
(4) Remove the LV fan ASSY from the Side frame R.
Side frame R
LV fan ASSY
<Right side>
Fig. 5-167
Assembling Note:
When assembling the LV fan ASSY, place it so that the attached label faces outwards.
Harness routing: Refer to “ Main Fan ASSY, LV Fan ASSY.”
5-134 Confidential
8.56 Main Fan ASSY
(1) Disconnect the Connector (CN2) of the Main fan ASSY from the High-voltage power
supply PCB ASSY.
High-voltage power supply PCB ASSY

Main fan ASSY
Side frame R
Connector
CN2
<Right side>
Fig. 5-168
(2) Remove the Main fan ASSY from the Side frame R.
Main fan ASSY
Side frame R
<Right side>
Fig. 5-169
Assembling Note:
When assembling the Main fan ASSY, place it so that the attached label faces outwards.
Harness routing: Refer to “ Main Fan ASSY, LV Fan ASSY.”
5-135 Confidential
8.57 Low-voltage Power Supply PCB ASSY
(1) Release the two Hooks to remove the Power supply switch from the Safety louver.
Hook
1a 1a
1b
Safety louver
Hook Hook Hook

Power supply switch
1d
1c
Fig. 5-170
(2) Remove the Screw pan (S/P washer) M4x8 DB and FG harness, and then remove the
Inlet from the Side frame R.
Side frame R
Inlet
Screw pan (S/P washer) M4x8 DB

FG harness
<Right side>
Fig. 5-171
5-136 Confidential
(3) Turn the Main body upside down.
(4) Remove the two Taptite bind B M4x12 screws to remove the Under bar from the Main
body.

Under bar
Main body
<Bottom of main body>
Fig. 5-172
(5) Disconnect the Connector (CN2) of the Heater 120V harness ASSY from the Low-voltage
power supply PCB ASSY.
CN2
Heater 120V harness ASSY
<Right side>
Fig. 5-173
5-137 Confidential
(6) Remove the two Taptite bind B M4x12 screws and two Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screws,
and then remove the LVPS unit from the Main body.
Main body
Middle plate
LVPS unit
Taptite bind B M4x12 <Back side>
Fig. 5-174
Assembling Note:
When assembling the LVPS unit onto the Main body, make sure to assemble it in a way that
the LVPS plate is placed at a lower position than the Middle plate.
LVPS plate Middle plate
LVPS unit
LVPS plate Middle plate
LVPS unit
Fig. 5-175
5-138 Confidential
(7) Remove the four Taptite pan (washer) B M4x12DA screws, and then remove the LVPS
plate from LVPS cover.

B M4x12DA
Taptite pan (washer) B M4x12DA
LVPS plate
LVPS cover
Fig. 5-176
(8) Remove the LVPS insulation sheet from the LVPS cover.
Positioning hole
LVPS insulation sheet
Positioning pin
Positioning hole
Positioning pin
LVPS cover
Fig. 5-177
5-139 Confidential
(9) Remove the Taptite pan (washer) B M4x12DA screw, and then remove the Low-voltage
power supply PCB ASSY from the LVPS cover.

B M4x12DA
LVPS cover
Fig. 5-178
(10) Disconnect the three Connectors (CN101, CN102, CN103) from the Low-voltage power
supply PCB ASSY.
CN102
Low-voltagpower supply PCB ASSY
CN101
CN103
Fig. 5-179
Harness routing: Refer to “ Low-voltage Power Supply PCB ASSY.”
5-140 Confidential
8.58 Registration Sensor Holder ASSY
(1) Remove the Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screw from the Registration sensor holder ASSY.
<Right side>
<Left side>
Fig. 5-180
(2) Wire the harness and release the Hook. Slide the Registration sensor holder ASSY in the
direction of the arrow 2a, and remove it from the Registration sensor plate.
<A view> 2a Registration sensor holder ASSY
A view
<Right side>
2b
Hook
Registration sensor plate
2a
Registration sensor plate
<Left side>
Fig. 5-181
Assembling Note:
- Be careful not to place the harness between the Registration sensor holder ASSY and the
Registration sensor plate when assembling the Registration sensor holder ASSY to the
Registration sensor plate.
- A reinforcement plate for transportation is assembled to the Registration sensor holder
ASSY (service part). Remove the reinforcement plate for transportation from the
Registration sensor holder ASSY before assembling.
Harness routing: Refer to “ Registration Sensor Holder ASSY.”
5-141 Confidential
8.59 High-voltage Power Supply PCB ASSY
(1) Remove the two Taptite bind B M4x12 screws and two Taptite pan (washer) B M4x12DA
screws from the High-voltage power supply PCB ASSY.
Taptite pan (washer) B M4x12DA
Fig. 5-182
(2) Remove the Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screw, and then remove the HVPS ground plate 2
from the High-voltage power supply PCB ASSY.
Taptite cup S M3x6 SR HVPS ground plate 2
Fig. 5-183
5-142 Confidential
(3) Disconnect the Flat cable (CN7) of the High-voltage power supply PCB ASSY from the
HVPS control PCB ASSY.
Note:
or short-circuited.
Flat cable
CN7
High-voltage power
supply PCB ASSY
Fig. 5-184
(4) Remove the two Spacer from the High-voltage power supply PCB ASSY.
Spacer
High-voltage power supply PCb ASSY
Side frame R
Fig. 5-185
5-143 Confidential
(5) Release the nine Hooks of the side frame R, and remove the high-voltage power supply
PCB ASSY together with the HVPS insulation sheet 1 and HVPS insulation sheet 2.
HVPS insulation sheet 1

Hook
Hook
Hook
Side frame R
Fig. 5-186
Assembling Note:
When replacing the High-voltage power supply PCB ASSY with a new one, fold the FFC
first in accordance with the “How to Fold FFC of High-voltage power supply PCB ASSY”
figure in the next page, and then assemble the High-voltage power supply PCB ASSY.
5-144 Confidential
<How to Fold FFC of High-voltage power supply PCB ASSY FFC> (full-scale)
3 mm

41 mm
45 °
157 mm
185 mm
202 mm
45 °
Flat cable
Fig. 5-187
5-145 Confidential
(6) Remove the HVPS insulation sheet 2 from the High-voltage power supply PCB ASSY.
Fig. 5-188
5-146 Confidential
(7) Remove the HVPS insulation sheet 1 from the High-voltage power supply PCB ASSY.
7b
7a
Fig. 5-189
Assembling Note:
When assembling the HVPS insulation sheet 1 and HVPS insulation sheet 2, make sure to
assemble them as sandwiching the Flat cable of the High-voltage power supply PCB ASSY
with them.
Flat cable High-voltage power supply PCB ASSY
Fig. 5-190
5-147 Confidential
8.60 HVPS Control PCB ASSY
(1) Disconnect the six Connectors (CN1, CN4, CN5, CN8, CN9, CN10) from the HVPS
control PCB ASSY.
CN8
CN7
CN1 CN9
CN3
CN10
CN5
CN4
Fig. 5-191
(2) Remove the Taptite pan (S/P W) B M3x10 screw, and then remove the HVPS control PCB
ASSY from the Side frame R.
Taptite pan (S/P W) B M3x10
Side frame R
Fig. 5-192
5-148 Confidential
8.61 Waste Toner Sensor
(1) Release the two Hooks to remove the Wire cover 2 from the Side frame R.
Side frame R
Wire cover 2
Hook
Fig. 5-193
Assembling Note:
When assembling the Wire cover 2, make sure to pass the Waste toner harness ASSY
through the “A” before assembling it.
"A"
Side frame R
Waste toner harness ASSY
Fig. 5-194
5-149 Confidential
(2) Press the Pin of the Waste toner sensor holder and slide the Waste toner sensor holder to
the left.

Middle plate sub ASSY

A view
Hook
<A view>
<Left side>
Pin
Middle plate sub ASSY Pin
Fig. 5-195
(3) Remove the Waste toner sensor holder from the Middle plate sub ASSY as shown in the
figure below.

Waste toner sensor
holder
3b
3a
A view Waste toner sensor holder
<A view>
3a
Fig. 5-196
5-150 Confidential
(4) Release the three Hooks to remove the Waste toner sensor from the Waste toner sensor
holder.
Hook
Hook
Hook
Waste toner sensor
Fig. 5-197
(5) Disconnect the Connector of the Waste toner harness ASSY from the Waste toner sensor.
Waste toner harness ASSY
Waste toner sensor
Fig. 5-198
Harness routing: Refer to “ Waste Toner Sensor.”
5-151 Confidential
8.62 Develop Release Sensor PCB ASSY
(1) Remove the Film from the Side frame R.
Film
Side frame R
Fig. 5-199
(2) Remove the Taptite cup B M3x8 screw, and then release the Hook to remove the Develop
release sensor PCB ASSY from the Side frame R.
Taptite cup B M3x8
Develop release sensor PCB ASSY
Hook
Side frame R
Fig. 5-200
Harness routing: Refer to “ Develop Release Sensor PCB ASSY, Top Cover Open Switch,
Toner LED PCB ASSY.”
5-152 Confidential
8.63 Belt Cleaner Spring
(1) Remove the four Electrode head 1 and four Electrode spring 1 from the Side frame R.
Electrode spring 1
Electrode head 1
Side frame R
Fig. 5-201
(2) Remove the four Electrode spring 2 from the Side frame R.
Electrode spring 2
Side frame R
Boss
Fig. 5-202
5-153 Confidential
Assembling Note:
When assembling the Electrode spring 2, make sure to insert the tip of the Spring under the
TR head spring until it hits the Stopper as shown in the figure below.
Electrode spring 2
TR head spring
TR head spring
Stopper
Fig. 5-203
(3) Remove the thirteen Electrode head 2 and thirteen Electrode spring 3 from the Side
frame R.
Electrode spring 3
Electrode head 2
Side frame R
Fig. 5-204
5-154 Confidential
(4) Remove the two Electrode head 2 and two Belt cleaner spring from the Side frame R.
Belt cleaner spring
Electrode Head 2
Side frame R
Fig. 5-205
(5) Remove the two Belt cleaner springs from the two Electrode head 2.
Belt cleaner spring
Electrode head 2
Fig. 5-206
5-155 Confidential
Memo:
Although the following parts are similar in shape, you can identify them by size.
Electrode spring 3
Belt cleaner spring
Electrode spring 1
Electrode head 2
Electrode head 1
Fig. 5-207
5-156 Confidential
8.64 TR Head Spring
(1) Release the four Hooks, slide the TR head cover in the direction of the arrow 1a, and
remove it from the Side frame R in the direction of the arrow 1b.
TR head cover
1b
Hook
1a
Side frame R
Hook
Hook
Fig. 5-208
(2) Remove the four Electrode head 2 and four TR head spring from the Side frame R.
TR head spring
Electrode head 2
Side frame R
Fig. 5-209
5-157 Confidential
Assembling Note:
When assembling the Electrode head 2 and TR head spring onto the Side frame R, make
sure to assemble them as shown in the figure below.
Electrode head 2 Electrode head 2
Hook
Hook
Hook
TR head spring
Fig. 5-210
(3) Remove the TR head spring from the four Electrode heads 2 (four springs in total).
TR head spring
Electrode head 2
Fig. 5-211
5-158 Confidential
8.65 Side Frame R
(1) Remove the four Shoulder screws M3, and then remove the Side frame R from the Base
frame unit.
Shoulder screw M3
Side frame R
1b
1a
Base frame unit
Fig. 5-212
(2) Remove the HVPS ground plate 1 from the Side frame R.
HVPS ground plate 1
2b
2a
Side frame R
Fig. 5-213
5-159 Confidential
(3) Release the two Hooks of the Top cover open switch to remove the Top cover open switch
from the Side frame R.
Top cover open switch

Hook
Top cover open switch Hook
Hook
3a 3a
Hook 3b
Side frame R
Fig. 5-214
(4) Release the Hook of the Lock arm from the Side frame R.
Lock arm
Hook
Side frame R
4b
Lock arm
4a
Hook
Side frame R
Fig. 5-215
5-160 Confidential
(5) Remove the Lock arm from the Side frame R.
Lock arm
Side frame R
Fig. 5-216
(6) Remove the Cassette lock spring from the Side frame R.
Note:
Be careful not to loose the Cassette lock spring.
Cassette lock spring
Side frame R
Fig. 5-217
5-161 Confidential
8.66 Toner LED PCB ASSY/LED Holder
(1) Press the Pin of the Side frame R, slide the Toner LED PCB ASSY in the direction of the
arrow 1b, and remove it.
Toner LED PCB ASSY
1b
Pin
Side frame R
1a
Hook
Pin
Fig. 5-218
(2) Release the two Hooks to remove the four LED holder from the Toner LED PCB ASSY.
LED holder
LED holder
Hook
Hook
Toner LED PCB ASSY LED holder

Hook
Fig. 5-219
5-162 Confidential
8.67 LM Hook B/LM Hook C/Hook Spring BC10
Note:
Be sure to mount the eject gear cover and cleaner PF gear cover before turning over the
side flame L.
(1) Remove the three Shoulder screws M3 and one Taptite cup S M3x6 SR screw, and then
remove the Side frame L from the Base frame unit.

Shoulder screw M3
Side frame L
Shoulder screw M3
Base frame unit
Fig. 5-220
(2) Remove the three Taptite bind B M4x12 screws, and then remove the Bevel gear cover
Bevel gear cover
Side frame L
Fig. 5-221
5-163 Confidential
(3) Remove the LM hook B and LM hook C from the Side frame L.
LM hook C
LM hook B
Side frame L
Fig. 5-222
(4) Remove the Hook spring BC10 from the LM hook B and the LM hook C.
Hook spring BC10
LM hook C
LM hook B
Hook
Hook
Fig. 5-223
5-164 Confidential
(5) Remove the LM hook B from the LM hook C.
LM hook B
LM hook C
Fig. 5-224
(6) Remove the Hook spring BC10 from the LM hook A and the Side frame L.
Hook spring BC10
Hook
Hook
Side frame L
LM hook A
Fig. 5-225
5-165 Confidential
CHAPTER 6
ADJUSTMENTS AND UPDATING OF SETTINGS,
Confidential
CHAPTER 6
ADJUSTMENTS AND UPDATING OF SETTINGS,
This chapter describes adjustments and updating of settings, which are required if the main PCB and
some other parts have been replaced. This chapter also covers how to update the firmware.
CONTENTS
1. IF YOU REPLACE THE MAIN PCB...........................................................6-1

1.1 Rewriting the Firmware (Main Firmware, Sub Firmware (GDI or PCL/PS)) ............... 6-7
1.1.1 Checking firmware version ................................................................................ 6-7
1.1.2 Rewriting the firmware using computer ............................................................. 6-7
1.1.3 Rewriting the firmware using USB flash memory (Wireless LAN model only)... 6-9
1.2 Setting by Country (Maintenance Mode: Code 74) .................................................. 6-11
1.3 Initialization of EEPROM of Main PCB (Maintenance Mode: Code 01).................... 6-11
1.4 Setting the Serial Number ........................................................................................ 6-11
1.5 Sensitivity Adjustment of Density Sensor (Maintenance Mode: Code 72)................ 6-13
1.6 Performing the Developing Bias Voltage Correction
(Maintenance Mode: Code 83) ................................................................................. 6-13
1.7 Performing the Adjustment of Color Registration (Maintenance Mode: Code 66).... 6-13
1.8 Operational Check of Control Panel Button (Maintenance Mode: Code 13) ............ 6-13
1.9 Acquiring MAC Address (Ethernet Address) from Wireless LAN PCB
(Wireless LAN model only) ....................................................................................... 6-13
2. IF YOU REPLACE THE WIRELESS LAN PCB

(WIRELESS LAN MODEL ONLY) ...........................................................6-14
2.1 Acquiring MAC Address (Ethernet Address) from Main PCB ................................... 6-14
3. IF YOU REPLACE THE REGISTRATION SENSOR HOLDER ASSY ....6-15

3.1 Sensitivity Adjustment of Density Sensor (Maintenance Mode: Code 72)................ 6-15
Confidential
1. IF YOU REPLACE THE MAIN PCB
■ What to do when replacing the main PCB
- Rewriting the firmware (Main firmware, sub firmware (GDI or PCL/PS))
- Setting by country (Maintenance mode: code 74)
- Initialization of EEPROM of main PCB (Maintenance mode: code 01)
- Setting the serial number
- Sensitivity adjustment of density sensor (Maintenance mode: code 72)
- Performing the developing bias voltage correction (Maintenance mode: code 83)
- Performing the adjustment of color registration (Maintenance mode: code 66)
- Operational check of control panel button (Maintenance mode: code 13)
- Acquiring MAC address (ethernet address) from wireless LAN PCB (Wireless LAN model only)
■ Which parts to use

Main PCB: The table below shows the ROM type.
Main PCB ROM 0 Main firmware
(For a spare parts) (Controller program, Network program)
ROM 1 Sub firmware
HL-3040CN/3045CN: GD I
HL-3070CW/3075CW: PCL/PS
■ What you need to prepare

(1) A USB cable
(2) A USB flash memory drive (Wireless LAN model only)
(3) Computer (Windows® XP or later)
Create a “hl3000” folder on the C drive, for example.
(4) The service setting tool (brusbn.zip)
Copy it into the “hl3000” folder that has been created in the C drive. Extract the copied file
and run “brusbsn.exe” file by double-clicking it.
(5) The download utility (FILEDG32.EXE)
Copy it into the “hl3000” folder that has been created in the C drive.
(6) The Brother maintenance USB printer driver (MaintenanceDriver.zip)
Copy it into the “hl3000” folder that has been created in the C drive. Extract the copied file.
(7) The firmware
Main firmware LZXXXX_$.djf or LZXXXX_$.upd*

Sub firmware HL-3040CN/3045CN: LZXXXX_$.upd
GDI
HL-3070CW/3075CW: LZXXXX_$.djf or LZXXXX_$.upd
PCL/PS
LZXXXX: First six digits are a parts number of the firmware.
$: Alphabet representing the revision of the firmware.
* upd: Used to rewrite the firmware via a computer.
djf: Used to rewrite the firmware using a USB flash memory. (Wireless LAN model only)
6-1 Confidential
(8) Installing the maintenance driver
To identify multiple machines connected to the computer via USB, the computer needs to
configure the corresponding number of virtual USB devices by a driver or software, If you
connect a multiple number of machines to your computer, the same number of virtual
USB devices will be automatically configured on your computer.
To prevent virtual USB devices from being configured without limitation, use the unique
driver installation procedure described below that enables your computer to identify
multiple machines via one single virtual USB device.
<Procedures>
1) While the machine is in the ready state, press the OK button and then Go button.
Next, press the button 4 times, and the machine goes into the maintenance mode.
2) “ ” appears on the LCD, and the machine goes into the
maintenance mode.
3) Double-click “Setup.exe” of the maintenance printer driver which is saved in the
“hl3000” folder to execute.
4) The following screen appears, indicating the detection of device driver installation
wizard. Click Next to proceed. (Screen below is the example of Windows® XP.)
6-2 Confidential
5) Alert warning message appears three times, click Continue Anyway to proceed.
6) If the device driver is successfully installed, the following message screen appears.
Click Finish to return.
6-3 Confidential
7) Connect the machine to your computer using the USB cable.
8) The following screen appears, indicating the detection of new hardware device by the
system. Select “No, not this time” and click Next.
9) Select “Install the software automatically (Recommended)” and click Next.
6-4 Confidential
10) Alert warning message appears, click Continue Anyway to proceed.
6-5 Confidential
11) If the Brother maintenance USB printer driver is successfully installed, the following
message screen appears. Click Finish to return.
12) Repeat the steps from 9) to 11) three times, and then complete its installation.
6-6 Confidential
1.1 Rewriting the Firmware
(Main Firmware, Sub Firmware (GDI or PCL/PS))
The following two methods are available for rewriting the firmware (Main firmware and Sub
firmware (GDI or PCL/PS)).
- Rewriting using a computer
- Rewriting using USB flash memory (USB host model only)
1.1.1 Checking firmware version

Check if the firmware written on the main PCB is the latest version or not. If it is the latest
version, there is no need to write the firmware. If it is not, make sure to write the firmware to
the main PCB in accordance with “1.1.2. Rewriting the firmware using computer” or “1.1.3
Rewriting the firmware using USB flash memory (Wireless LAN model only)” in this chapter.
<How to check firmware version>

(1) Press the or button in the initial state of the maintenance mode to display
“MAINTENANCE 25” and press the OK button. Then, the firmware version information is
displayed on the LCD.
1.1.2 Rewriting the firmware using computer

The following firmware files are needed to rewrite the firmware.
Sub firmware HL-3040CN/3045CN: LZXXXX_$.upd
GDI
HL-3070CW/3075CW: LZXXXX_$.upd
PCL/PS
Main firmware LZXXXX_$.upd
Note:
- It is recommendable to rewrite 1) Sub firmware (GDI or PCL/PS) and 2) Main
firmware in this order.
- DO NOT unplug the power cord of the machine or your computer or disconnect the
USB cable while rewriting the program files.
<Procedures>
(1) Turn the power switch of the machine off. Then, turn it on while pressing the Go and
Cancel buttons at the same time. Check that “ ” appears on the LCD.
(2) Double-click the “FILEDG32.EXE” to start. The following screen appears. Select the
“Brother Maintenance USB Printer.”
6-7 Confidential
(3) Click the “Brother Maintenance USB Printer” icon to select. Drag the necessary firmware
program file such as LZXXXX_$.upd and drop it.
Note:
After rewriting Sub firmware (GDI or PCL/PS) or Main firmware is completed, the
machine returns to the ready state. To continue rewriting the other program files,
turn off the power switch of the machine, and turn it on again while pressing the
Go and Cancel buttons at the same time. Check that “ ” appears on
the LCD and start rewriting.
(4) Upon completion of rewriting, the machine restarts and returns to the ready state
automatically.
6-8 Confidential
1.1.3 Rewriting the firmware using USB flash memory (Wireless LAN model only)
If you save the program files in the USB flash memory drive and plug it into the USB direct
interface, you can rewrite the firmware.
When a USB flash memory is used, the following firmware files are needed to rewrite the
firmware.
Sub firmware (PCL/PS) LZXXXX_$.djf
Main firmware LZXXXX_$.djf

Note:
- Make sure that the USB flash memory drive has enough space to save the program file.
- It is recommendable to rewrite 1) Sub firmware (PCL/PS) and 2) Main firmware in this
order.
- If rewriting the firmware using a USB flash memory fails and an error message appears
on the LCD, or no message appears on the LCD, it will be necessary to rewrite the
firmware from a computer using the “FILEDG32.EXE.” (Refer to “1.1.2 Rewriting the
firmware using computer” in this chapter.)
<Procedures>
(1) Save the program files (such as LZXXXX_$.djf) which are necessary for rewriting the
firmware that prepared in the “hl3000” folder to the USB flash memory.
(2) While the machine is in the ready state, connect the USB flash memory drive to the USB
direct interface on the front of the machine.
Fig. 6-1
(3) When the machine recognizes the USB flash memory, the names of the files stored in the
USB flash memory are displayed. Select an appropriate file using the or button,
and then press the Go or OK button.
Memo:
To print and check the list of data stored in the USB flash memory, display the LCD,
select “Index Print” using the or button, and then press the Go or OK button.
(4) “Program Update/Press Go” appears on the LCD. Press the Go or OK button to start.
“Program Updating/Do not turn OFF” message appears on the LCD with Data LED
blinking while rewriting the firmware. DO NOT turn off the machine.
(5) When the rewrite is finished, the machine automatically restarts.
6-9 Confidential
(6) If you continue to rewrite other firmware and no file names are displayed, wait for a while,
and take out the USB flash memory and insert it again. When file names are displayed,
select the program files which need to be rewritten, and repeat the above procedures (3)
to (5) to rewrite all the selected program files.
(7) When the rewrite of the main firmware is finished, the machine automatically restarts.
(8) Remove the USB flash memory drive from the USB direct interface once the update have
finished.
(9) Next, make the settings according to the country. (Refer to “1.4.16 Setting by country” in
Chapter 7.)
Memo:
You can check the firmware version of the Main firmware and the Sub firmware (GDI or
PCL/PS) by printing the Printer Settings. (Refer to “2.4 Print out of Printer Settings” in
Chapter 7.)
6-10 Confidential
1.2 Setting by Country (Maintenance Mode: Code 74)
Make appropriate settings by country in accordance with “1.4.16 Setting by country” in
Chapter 7.
1.3 Initialization of EEPROM of Main PCB (Maintenance

Mode: Code 01)
Initialize the EEPROM in accordance with “1.4.1 EEPROM parameter initialization” in Chapter 7.
1.4 Setting the Serial Number

<Procedures>
(1) Connect the PC and machine with the USB cable.
(2) Double-click the brusbsn.exe file which has been copied in the “hl3000” folder to start.
(3) Click the C-Laser 10Model.

(4) In Port on the brusbsn screen, select the port number assigned to the Brother
Maintenance USB Printer. If the port number is unknown, follow steps below.
1) Click Start | Settings | Printers.
6-11 Confidential
The Printers window appears as shown below.
2) Right-click the Brother Maintenance USB Printer icon.
3) Click Properties.
The Brother Maintenance USB Printer Properties window appears as shown below.
4) Click the Ports tab.
In this example, the port number assigned to the Brother Maintenance USB Printer is
USB001.
(5) Enter the serial number (the nine digits) of the machine into the box on the “Serial No”.
(6) Click the [OK] button. The serial number is written in the machine.
Memo:
Refer to APPENDIX. 3 to know how to read the serial number of the machine.
6-12 Confidential
1.5 Sensitivity Adjustment of Density Sensor
(Maintenance Mode: Code 72)
Make sensitivity adjustments of the density sensor in accordance with “1.4.15 Sensitivity
adjustment of density sensor” in Chapter 7.
1.6 Performing the Developing Bias Voltage Correction

Perform developing bias voltage correction in accordance with “1.4.22 Developing bias voltage
correction” in Chapter 7.
1.7 Performing the Adjustment of Color Registration

Perform adjustment of color registration in accordance with “1.4.10 Adjustment of color
registration” in Chapter 7.
1.8 Operational Check of Control Panel Button

Check performance of the panel button in accordance with “1.4.5 Operational check of control
panel button” in Chapter 7.
1.9 Acquiring MAC Address (Ethernet Address) from

Wireless LAN PCB (Wireless LAN model only)
<Procedures>
(1) Turn ON the power as holding down the button and OK button at the same time.
Keep holding down the button and OK buttons until “Check start” appears.
(2) When the MAC address (Ethernet address) is acquired from the wireless LAN PCB,
“W Lan Module OK” is displayed on the LCD.
(3) Turn OFF the power.
6-13 Confidential
2. IF YOU REPLACE THE WIRELESS LAN
PCB (WIRELESS LAN MODEL ONLY)
■ What to do when replacing the wireless LAN PCB
Obtaining the MAC Address (Ethernet Address)
2.1 Acquiring MAC Address (Ethernet Address) from Main

PCB
<Procedures>
(1) Turn ON the power as holding down the button and OK buttons at the same time.
Keep holding down the button and OK buttons until “Check start” appears.
(2) When the MAC address (Ethernet address) is acquired from the main PCB,
“W Lan Module OK” is displayed on the LCD.
(3) Turn OFF the power.
6-14 Confidential
3. IF YOU REPLACE THE REGISTRATION
SENSOR HOLDER ASSY
■ What to do when replacing the registration sensor holder ASSY
Sensitivity Adjustment of Density Sensor (Maintenance Mode: Code 72)
3.1 Sensitivity Adjustment of Density Sensor

Make adjustments of the density sensor in accordance with “1.4.15 Sensitivity adjustment of
density sensor” in Chapter 7.
6-15 Confidential
CHAPTER 7
SERVICE FUNCTIONS
Confidential
CHAPTER 7
SERVICE FUNCTIONS
Describes the maintenance mode which is exclusively designed for the purpose of checking the settings
and adjustments using the buttons on the control panel.
This chapter also covers not-disclosed-to-users function menus, which activate settings and functions or
reset the parts life.
CONTENTS
1. MAINTENANCE MODE..............................................................................7-1
1.1 How to Enter the Maintenance Mode ......................................................................... 7-1
1.2 How to Enter the End User-accessible Maintenance Mode ....................................... 7-1
1.3 List of Maintenance-mode Functions.......................................................................... 7-2
1.4 Detailed Description of Maintenance-mode Functions ............................................... 7-3
1.4.1 EEPROM parameter initialization (Function code 01, 91) ................................. 7-3
1.4.2 Monochrome image quality test pattern (Function code 09).............................. 7-4
1.4.3 Worker switch (WSW) setting and printout (Function code 10, 11) ................... 7-5
1.4.4 Operational check of LCD (Function code 12) .................................................. 7-8
1.4.5 Operational check of control panel button (Function code 13) .......................... 7-9
1.4.6 Software version check (Function code 25)..................................................... 7-10
1.4.7 “One Push Demo” setting (Function code 28) ................................................. 7-11
1.4.8 Operational check of sensors (Function code 32) ........................................... 7-12
1.4.9 Not-disclosed-to-users functions (Function code 45) ...................................... 7-15
1.4.10 Adjustment of color registration (Function code 66) ...................................... 7-20
1.4.11 Continuous print test (Function code 67) ....................................................... 7-23
1.4.12 LED test pattern print (Function code 68)...................................................... 7-25
1.4.13 Frame pattern print (Function code 69) ......................................................... 7-27
1.4.14 Color test pattern (Function code 71) ............................................................ 7-29
1.4.15 Sensitivity adjustment of density sensor (Function code 72)......................... 7-31
1.4.16 Setting by country (Function code 74)........................................................... 7-32
1.4.17 Sensitivity adjustment of registration mark sensor and check of belt surface
(Function code 75)........................................................................................... 7-34
1.4.18 Printout of maintenance information (Function code 77)............................... 7-36
1.4.19 Operational check of fans (Function code 78)............................................... 7-38
1.4.20 Display of the machine’s log (Function code 80) ........................................... 7-39
1.4.21 Error code indication (Function code 82)....................................................... 7-43
1.4.22 Developing bias voltage correction (Function code 83)................................. 7-44
1.4.23 Exit from the maintenance mode (Function code 99).................................... 7-45
Confidential
2. OTHER SERVICE FUNCTIONS...............................................................7-46
2.1 Not-disclosed-to-users Function Menus Enabled by Pressing Button (s)
When Turning the Machine On................................................................................. 7-46
2.2 Develop Roller Counter Reset Function ................................................................... 7-48
2.3 Parts Life Reset Function ......................................................................................... 7-49
2.4 Printout of Printer Settings........................................................................................ 7-50
2.5 How to Recover from Errors of the Fuser Unit ......................................................... 7-54
2.6 Switching of Return Value of USB No./Support for Banding..................................... 7-55
Confidential
1. MAINTENANCE MODE
The maintenance mode is exclusively designed for the checking, setting and adjustments of
the machine by using the buttons on the control panel cover ASSY. You can perform
operational checks of sensors, perform a print test, display the log information or error codes,
and modify the worker switch (WSW).
1.1 How to Enter the Maintenance Mode

<Operating procedure>
(1) Press the OK button and then the Go button while the machine is in the ready state.
Next, press the button four times to enter the maintenance mode.
Note:
To enter the maintenance mode, you must press the Go button within 2 seconds after
pressing the OK button. Also, you need to press the button within 2 seconds after
pressing the Go button.
(2) The machine displays “ ” on the LCD, indicating that it is placed in

the initial state of the maintenance mode, a mode in which the machine is ready to accept
entry from the buttons.
(3) To select one of the maintenance-mode functions listed in the next page, press
the or button to display any function code on the LCD. Then press the OK button.
1.2 How to Enter the End User-accessible Maintenance

Mode
Basically, the maintenance-mode functions listed in the next page should be accessed by
service personnel only. However, you can allow end users to access some of these under the
guidance of service personnel by phone, for example.
The end user-accessible functions are shaded in the table given on the next page. (codes 09,
12, 25, 28, 68, 71, 72, 75, 77, 80, 82 and 91)
(1) Press the OK, Go and OK buttons in this order when the machine is in the ready state.
“0” appears on the LCD.
(2) Press the or button to display the desired maintenance code on the LCD. Then
press the OK button.
When each of the user-accessible functions is completed, the machine automatically returns
to the ready state. As for the codes 12, 25, 28, 45, 68, 71, 72, 75, 80 and 82, press the
Cancel button to switch the machine return to the ready state.
7-1 Confidential
1.3 List of Maintenance-mode Functions
Function code Function Refer to:
01 EEPROM parameter initialization 1.4.1 (7-3)
09 Monochrome image quality test pattern 1.4.2 (7-4)
10 Worker switch (WSW) setting 1.4.3 [1] (7-5)
11 Printout of worker switch (WSW) data 1.4.3 [2] (7-7)
12 Operational check of LCD 1.4.4 (7-8)
13 Operational check of control panel button 1.4.5 (7-9)
25 Software version check 1.4.6 (7-10)
28 “One Push Demo” setting 1.4.7 (7-11)
32 Operational check of sensors 1.4.8 (7-12)
45 Not-disclosed-to-users functions 1.4.9 (7-15)
66 Adjustment of color registration 1.4.10 (7-20)
67 Continuous print test 1.4.11 (7-23)
68 LED test pattern print 1.4.12 (7-25)
69 Frame pattern print 1.4.13 (7-27)
71 Color test pattern 1.4.14 (7-29)
72 Sensitivity adjustment of density sensor 1.4.15 (7-31)
74 Setting by country 1.4.16 (7-32)
75 Sensitivity adjustment of registration mark sensor and 1.4.17 (7-34)

check of belt surface
77 Printout of maintenance information 1.4.18 (7-36)
78 Operational check of fans 1.4.19 (7-38)
80 Display of the machine’s log 1.4.20 (7-39)
82 Error code indication 1.4.21 (7-43)
83 Developing bias voltage correction 1.4.22 (7-44)
91 EEPROM parameter initialization 1.4.1 (7-3)
99 Exit from the maintenance mode 1.4.23 (7-45)
*The functions shaded in the table above are user-accessible.
7-2 Confidential
1.4 Detailed Description of Maintenance-mode Functions
1.4.1 EEPROM parameter initialization (Function code 01, 91)
<Function>
This function initializes the setting values of the operation parameters, user switches, and
worker switches (WSW) registered in the EEPROM.
Entering function code 01 initializes almost all of the EEPROM areas, but entering 91 does not
initialize some areas, as listed below.
Data item Function code 01 Function code 91
User switches (Items to be initialized

These will be
when resetting to the factory default
initialized.
settings)
Worker switch These will not be

(Refer to APPENDIX 1.) initialized.
Function settings except user switches

(Items except the factory default
settings)
- Languages
All of these will be
- Reprint
initialized.
- Secure Print These will be
initialized.
- Interfaces
LAN area (Network settings)
PCL core area

(Emulation settings)
Operation lock of the control panel These will not be

password initialized.
(1) Press the or button to display “MAINTENANCE 01” (or “MAINTENANCE 91”
according to your need) on the LCD in the initial state of the maintenance mode.
Then, press the OK button. The “PARAMETER INIT” appears on the LCD.
(2) Upon completion of parameter initialization, the machine returns to the initial state of the
maintenance mode.
7-3 Confidential
1.4.2 Monochrome image quality test pattern (Function code 09)
<Function>
This function allows you to print various monochrome test patterns and check the quality and if
there is any image loss.
(1) Press the or button to display “MAINTENANCE 09” on the LCD in the initial state of
the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button.
(2) Printing of a monochrome image quality test pattern (see the figure below) is started.
When printing is finished, the machine returns to the initial state of the maintenance
mode.
Fig. 7-1
7-4 Confidential
1.4.3 Worker switch (WSW) setting and printout (Function code 10, 11)
[1] Worker switch setting (Function code 10)
<Function>
The machine incorporates the following worker switch functions which may be activated with
the procedures using the buttons on the control panel cover ASSY. The worker switches have
been set at the factory in conformity to the communications standards and codes of each
country. Do not disturb them unless necessary. Some worker switches may not be applicable
in some versions. The worker switch data list indicates “Not used.” for those inapplicable
switches.
CAUTION
DO NOT change any other worker switches except below.
WSW No. Function Refer to:
WSW47 Switching between high-speed USB and full-speed USB App. 1-2
WSW54 PictBridge command delay time App. 1-2

WSW55 Interval of time required for the developing bias voltage App. 1-3
correction
WSW56 “Last Job Reprint” function setting App. 1-4
Switching of the display for the coverage of toner cartridge
Switching of the CPU sleep mode
WSW59 Enabling and disabling of transmission of USB serial App. 1-4

number (SN)
WSW63 Font support for Israel App. 1-5
WSW64 Language setting App. 1-5
Default paper size
WSW65 Default media type App. 1-5
Support for Bond paper
Support for Hagaki
Support for Label
WSW66 Reserved (Change of the setting is prohibited) App. 1-6

* For details of the worker switches (WSW), refer to APPENDIX 1.
7-5 Confidential
(2) The machine displays “WSW00” on the LCD and becomes ready to accept a worker
switch number.
(3) Press the or button to select the desired number from the worker switch numbers.
Then, press OK button.
(4) The following appears on the LCD.
Selector 1 Selector 8
(5) “1” is set by pressing the button and “0” is set by pressing the button.
Press the button if you want to input “1” to the selector 1 and press the button if you
want to input “0.”
(6) The cursor moves to the right onto the selector 2. Repeat to enter the desired number as
described step (5) until the modification for the desired worker switches is completed till
the selector 8. Press the Back button to go back to the previous selector if there is a
mistake. Then, enter the desired number again.
(7) Press the OK button when the setting value is entered. This operation saves the newly
entered selector values onto the EEPROM and readies the machine for accepting a
firmware switch number.
The machine displays “WSW00” on the LCD again to accept a worker switch number.
(8) Press the Cancel button to return to the machine to the initial state of the maintenance mode.
Memo:
- To cancel this operation and return to the machine to the initial state of the maintenance
mode during the above procedure, press the Cancel button.
- If there is a pause of more than one minute, the machine will automatically return to the
initial state of the maintenance mode.
7-6 Confidential
[2] Printout of worker switch data (Function code 11)
<Function>
The machine prints out the setting items of the worker switches and their contents specified.
the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. The machine displays “PRINTING”
on the LCD.
(2) Printing of the CONFIGURATION LIST (see the figure below) is started. When printing is
finished, the machine returns to the initial state of the maintenance mode.
Fig. 7-2
Note:
The function names specific to multi-function machines are printed in CONFIGURATION
LIST for convenience of program development. They are invalid in this product and should
be ignored.
These settings must not be changed.
7-7 Confidential
1.4.4 Operational check of LCD (Function code 12)
<Function>
This function allows you to check whether the LCD on the control panel cover ASSY works
normally.
(2) Each time you press the Go button, the LCD cycles through the displays as shown below.
(3) Press Cancel button in any process of the display cycle. The machine returns to the
<Display 1>
Backlight : OFF
LCD : Display of all dots Display 1
Data LED : Green blinking
Error LED : Red blinking
<Display 2>
Backlight : OFF Display 2
LCD : Display of 16 frames
per line
Display 3
<Display 3>
Backlight : OFF
LCD : Display of no dots
Display 4
<Display 4>
Backlight : ON (Wireless LAN
model only)
LCD : Display of no dots
Fig. 7-3
7-8 Confidential
1.4.5 Operational check of control panel button (Function code 13)
<Function>
This function allows you to check if the buttons on the control panel cover ASSY work properly.
the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. The machine displays “00” on the
LCD.
(2) Press the buttons in the order designated in the illustration shown below.
The LCD shows the corresponding number in decimal notation each time a button is
pressed. Check that the displayed number is correct by referring to the illustration below.
If a button is pressed out of order, the machine displays the “INVALID OPERATE” on the
LCD. To return to the ready state to accept button entry for operational check, press the
Cancel button.
(3) After the last number button is pressed, the machine returns to the initial state of the
maintenance mode.
Memo:
To terminate this operation, press the Cancel button. The machine returns to the initial
state of the maintenance mode.
1 2
5 6 7
4
Fig. 7-4
7-9 Confidential
1.4.6 Software version check (Function code 25)
<Function>
This function allows you to check the management information of the software programs such
as version information, check sum.
the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. The machine displays each of items
described below on the LCD.
(2) Press the Go, or button to check the next item.
(3) To terminate this operation, press the Cancel button. The machine returns to the initial
LCD Description
MAIN: Ver1.00 (A)*1 Main firmware version information

(A): Revision information
PCL : Ver1.00 (P)*1 Sub firmware (GDI or PCL/PS) version information
(P): Identifier of GDI or PCL/PS*2
ENG : Ver1.00 Engine firmware version information
NET : Ver1.00 Network program version information
PICT: Ver1.00 PictBridge version information (Wireless LAN model only)
HV : Ver1.00 BXXX High voltage CPU program version and PCB information
B0608071049:5708*1 Boot program creation date
U0612271600:7B0A*1 Main firmware creation date
D0611301115:E6C3*1 Demo firmware data creation date
P0612271602:BD40*1 Sub firmware (GDI or PCL/PS) creation date
ROM Check Sum Check sum self-diagnosis function*3
*1 How to display the check sum information
Press the OK button when its version information is displayed on the LCD to display
the check sum information. Press the OK button again to go back to the version
information display. Press the Go, or button to check the next item.
Note:
Regarding the version information (Engine, Network, PictBridge, and HVPS) of
which check sum information cannot be obtained, the check sum information is not
displayed even if you press the OK button.
*2
(P) indicates that the firmware supports PCL/PS, and (G) indicates that it supports GDI.
*3
There are two types of check sum information which can be checked with this function.
This function checks if these two types of check sum information are matched each other.
When you press the OK button while “ROM Check Sum” is displayed, check is
automatically conducted for each ROM of each software part. When the check sum is
matched, “OK” is displayed on the LCD. When all ROMs result in OK, “ROM Check Sum
OK” is displayed at the end, and the operation is finished.
When the check sum of any ROM is not matched, NG is displayed, and the display stops.
7-10 Confidential
1.4.7 “One Push Demo” setting (Function code 28)
<Function>
The One Push Demo function is to implement demo printing by pressing the Go button, which
is mainly used for sales promotion at the shop. It is disabled if printing from a computer even
once.
Therefore, it is necessary to change the setting so that the function is enabled again.
OnePushDemo = ON (Enabled) / OFF (Disabled)
The default setting is displayed with “*”.
<Operating Procedure: How to set “OnePushDemo = ON”>

the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. The machine displays “One Push
Demo=ON” on the LCD.
(2) Press the OK button so that the One Push Demo function is set to be enabled.
(3) The machine automatically returns to the initial state of the maintenance mode.
Note:
- To terminate this operation, press the Cancel button. The machine returns to the initial
- Once the One Push Demo function is enabled, printing from a computer does not disable
this function unless the power is turned OFF. (After the One Push Demo function is
enabled, if the power is turned OFF and ON again, and then printing is made from a
computer, the function is disabled.)
7-11 Confidential
1.4.8 Operational check of sensors (Function code 32)
<Function>
This function allows you to check each of the sensors.
<Operational procedure>
(1) Press the or button to display “MAINTENANCE 32” on the LCD in the initial state
of the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button.
(2) The operation condition of the sensor becomes the one defined in the table below, and
“P1MPCVRCRMRAPOFW” is displayed on the LCD. When the Go button is pressed, the
selected item is switched to the next item.
Given below is the relationship between the LCD indication, sensor name and sensor
state.
LCD Sensors Sensing status (OK/NG)
P1 Paper eject rear sensor Paper not detected/detected

MP Manual sensor Paper not detected/detected
CV Top cover sensor Top cover closed/open
RC Back cover sensor Back cover closed/open
RM Registration front sensor Paper not detected/detected
RA Registration rear sensor Paper not detected/detected
PO Paper eject front sensor Paper not detected/detected
FW Waste toner sensor Toner full/not detected
NK New toner sensor K OFF/ON
NY New toner sensor Y OFF/ON
NM New toner sensor M OFF/ON
NC New toner sensor C OFF/ON
KC Toner sensor K Toner (K) detected/not detected
YC Toner sensor Y Toner (Y) detected/not detected
MC Toner sensor M Toner (M) detected/not detected
CC Toner sensor C Toner (C) detected/not detected
Note:
- The “--” appears on the LCD if there is no display.
- The “**” appears on the LCD if the parts are not installed or there is no item.
7-12 Confidential
Sensing status
LCD Sensors
(OK/NG of temperature/humidity)
TMP External temperature sensor XX °C/NG
HUM External humidity sensor XX %/NG
MAC Internal temperature sensor XX °C/NG
BT Belt thermistor *1 XX °C/NG

*1
If the version of the main firmware is after the version shown in the table below, the
temperature inside of the machine is displayed.
Model Main firmware version

Note:
If the sensor detects the abnormal value, the machine displays “NG” on the LCD.
(3) Change the detecting conditions to check that the indication on the LCD changes
according to the sensor state. For instance, insert paper through the registration front/
rear sensor, open the top cover or the back cover, remove the toner cartridge, jam paper
at the paper outlet and insert paper from the manual feed slot, etc.
(4) Press the Cancel button to return the machine to the initial state of the maintenance
mode.
7-13 Confidential
■ Location of sensors
Waste toner
sensor holder
Registration rear sensor
New toner sensor C Registration front

sensor
Toner sensor C
New toner sensor M sensor PCB ASSY
Toner sensor M Manual sensor
New toner sensor Y Waste toner sensor
Toner sensor Y
New toner sensor K Paper feed unit
Toner sensor K
<Front>
Fig. 7-5

Belt thermistor *1
Paper eject rear sensor
Registration sensor
holder ASSY
Top cover sensor
Internal temperature sensor
Back cover
sensor
Paper eject front

sensor
External temperature/
humidity sensor
<Front>
Fig. 7-6
*1
7-14 Confidential
1.4.9 Not-disclosed-to-users functions (Function code 45)
Regarding the not-disclosed-to-users functions, the function setting can be executed by a
simple panel operation. (Refer to “2.6 Switching of Return Value of USB No./Support for
Banding” in this chapter.)
■ Switching of the USB transfer speed in the PictBridge mode
<Function>
This function allows you to change the USB transfer speed in the PictBridge mode. If the
digital camera which a user uses cannot be connected in the PictBridge mode, this function
may make it possible.
LCD Description
PB.Speed=AUTO Adapts the speed to the capability of the USB device. (Full Speed or
High Speed) (default)
PB.Speed=FULL Fixes the speed to Full Speed. The capability of the USB device is
not depended on.
An asterisk “*” appears beside the current setting.
the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. “PB.USBspeed” will appear on the
LCD.
(2) Press the OK button. Then, select the required function by pressing the or button
and press the OK or Go button.
(3) The machine returns to the initial state of the maintenance mode.
(4) Turn the power switch of the machine OFF.
Note:
This mode is enabled when the power of the machine is turned OFF and ON.
7-15 Confidential
■ Changing return value of USB No.
<Function>
When the OS of the computer is Windows Vista®, and the computer is connected to a device
through USB 2.0 full speed, the OS might fail to get the serial No. of the USB device
depending on the computer and USB device. When the OS fails to get the serial No., the
return value may continue to increase every time the device is connected to the computer.
To avoid this problem, the return value of the serial No. is dropped to “0”.
LCD Description
USBNo. =ON Returns the serial No. of the device. (default)
USBNo. =OFF Returns “0”.
LCD.
(2) Press the or button to display “USB No.” and then press the OK or Go button.
(3) Press the or button to select “USB No. = ON” or “ USB No. = OFF,” and then press
the OK or Go button.
(5) Turn the power switch of the machine OFF.
Note:
This mode is enabled when the power of the machine is turned OFF and ON.
7-16 Confidential
■ Switching dither pattern
<Function>
This function is to switch the dither pattern when printed letters and/or slanted lines are not
smooth, and thin lines are rough or uneven.
LCD Description
PS.DitherType=0 Dither Pattern 0 is selected.

(A dither pattern which improves roughness of letters and slanted
lines)
PS.DitherType=1 Dither Pattern 1 is selected.

(A dither pattern which alleviates banding) (default)
LCD.
(2) Press the or button to display “PS.DitherType” and then press the OK or Go button.
(3) Press the or button to select “PS.DitherType=0” or “ PS.DitherType=1,” and then
press the OK or Go button.
■ Switching ON/OFF of 94 mm banding measure GridBias control function
<Function>
This function is to switch ON/OFF of the control (Engine control) to make print by increasing
GridBias at the 94-mm position from the leading edge of each page in order to avoid a banding
failure.
LCD Description
Bd94GrdBias=ON 94 mm Banding measure GridBias control function ON (default)
Bd94GrdBias=OFF 94 mm Banding measure GridBias control function OFF
LCD.
(2) Press the or button to display “Bd94GrdBias” and then press the OK or Go button.
(3) Press the or button to select “Bd94GrdBias=ON” or “ Bd94GrdBias=OFF,” and then
7-17 Confidential
■ Switching ON/OFF of 94 mm Banding measure transfer current correction/
DCLN voltage correction
<Function>
This function is to switch ON/OFF of the transfer current correction/DCLN voltage correction
control (Engine control) to the 94-mm position from the leading edge of each page in order to
avoid a banding failure. When banding appears, switch this control as a measure.
LCD Description
Bd94CrctSub=ON 94 mm Banding measure transfer current correction/

DCLN voltage correction ON
Bd94CrctSub=OFF 94 mm Banding measure transfer current correction/

DCLN voltage correction OFF (default)

LCD.
(2) Press the or button to display “Bd94CrctSub” and then press the OK or Go button.
(3) Press the or button to select “Bd94CrctSub=ON” or “ Bd94CrctSub=OFF,” and then
■ Switching ON/OFF of DirectPrint Color mode - Improve Gray Color
<Function>
This function is to switch ON/OFF of the print control for the gray color when other colors are
slightly blended in the gray color or the gray color is uneven upon printing.
LCD Description
DP.ImpGray=ON DirectPrint Color mode - Improve Gray Color. (Print control for
gray color) ON (Improves the symptom that other colors are
slightly blended in the gray color.) (default)
DP.ImpGray=OFF DirectPrint Color mode - Improve Gray Color. (Print control for
gray color) OFF (Improves the unevenness of the gray color)

LCD.
(2) Press the or button to display “DP.ImpGray” and then press the OK or Go button.
(3) Press the or button to select “DP.ImpGray=ON” or “ DP.ImpGray=OFF,” and then
7-18 Confidential
■ Switching of timing to execute Auto Registration (HL-3045CN/3075CW only)
<Function>
Relative displacement between Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black is detected using the
registration mark sensor, and the Auto Registration is executed at the timing when the
displacement value exceeds the stipulated threshold value.
This is a function to switch the threshold value which is used as the timing to execute Auto
Registration.
The threshold value can be switched in three phases between High, Mid, and Low.
LCD Description
Regi Freq=Mid The frequency to execute Auto Registration is middle. (default)

Regi Freq=High The frequency to execute Auto Registration is high.
Regi Freq=Low The frequency to execute Auto Registration is low.
“*” is displayed at the end of the currently specified function in the LCD display.
Note:
It can be set regardless of the Auto Registration switching function in the function
menu.
Even if this function is switched, it does not affect the timing to execute Auto Registration
in the function menu.
the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. The “PB.USBspeed” will appear on
the LCD.
(2) Press the or button to display “Regi Freq” and then press the OK or Go button.
(3) Select “Regi Freq = Mid”, “Regi Freq = High”, or “Regi Freq = Low” by pressing
the or button, and press the OK or Go button.
(4) “Accepted” is displayed on the LCD, and the printer goes back to the initial state of the
maintenance mode.
7-19 Confidential
1.4.10 Adjustment of color registration (Function code 66)
<Function>
This function allows a service man to forcibly activate the color registration adjustment
function, which is usually executed automatically in a specified condition. If adjustment of
color registration fails because toner reaches its life, etc., you can adjust color registration
manually.
■ Adjustment of color registration (auto)

of the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. “REGISTRATION” is displayed on
the LCD.
(2) Press the OK button. “PLEASE WAIT” is displayed on the LCD, and adjustment of color
registration is automatically done.
(3) When this operation is completed without an error, “COMPLETED” is displayed on the LCD.
(4) Press the Cancel button to return to the machine to the initial state of the maintenance
mode.
When an error message is displayed on the LCD, take the measures described in the
table below.
Error message Measure
FAILED Press the Go button to clear the error. Adjust color registration
manually in accordance with the procedure for adjustment of
color registration (manual) given in the next page.
TONER EMPTY # * Replace the empty toner cartridge and press the Go button to clear
the error. Conduct adjustment of color registration (auto) again.
No Paper Replenish paper of the A4-size paper specified in the display on
the tray.
REGI WIDTH Press the Go button to clear the error.
ERROR
Jam Tray 1 Remove the jammed paper, and press the Go button to clear
the error.
Jam Rear
* # indicates the toner color (C, M, or Y) of which cartridge became empty.
Memo:
Although adjustment of color registration (auto) is executed several times and the result of
color registration adjustment chart (P7-22) does not fall within the range of ±4, readjust it
according to the following procedures.
1) Press the or button to display “MAINTENANCE 66” on the LCD in the initial
state of the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. “REGISTRATION” is
displayed on the LCD. Load A4-size paper on the tray.
2) Press the or button to display “PRINT CHART” on the LCD, and then press the
OK button.
3) Display “PRINTING” on the LCD, and print the color registration adjustment chart.
After printing, “PRINT CHART” is displayed again.
4) Press the or button to display “OFFSET ADJUST” on the LCD, and then press
the OK button. “4. MAGENTA = 0” is displayed on the LCD.
7-20 Confidential
5) With the printed color registration adjustment chart, check the numeric value where
the color is the darkest among the pattern 4 (Magenta Center). Press the or
button to display that numeric value, and then press the Go button.
6) Enter the numeric value of the patterns 5 to 6 in the same way.
7) When you enter the numeric value of the pattern 6 (Yellow Center), “COMPLETED”
is displayed.
8) Press the Cancel button to return to the machine to the initial state of the
maintenance mode.
■ Adjustment of color registration (manual)
the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. “REGISTRATION” is displayed on
the LCD. Load A4-size paper on the tray.
(2) Press the or button to display “PRINT CHART” on the LCD, and then press the OK
button.
(3) Display “PRINTING” on the LCD, and print the color registration adjustment chart. After
printing, “PRINT CHART” is displayed again.
(4) Press the or button to display “SET REGISTRATION” on the LCD, and then press
the OK button. “1. MAGENTA = 0” is displayed on the LCD.
(5) With the printed color registration adjustment chart, check the numeric value where the
color is the darkest among the pattern 1 (Magenta Left). Press the or button to
display that numeric value, and then press the Go button.
(6) Enter the numeric value of the patterns 2 to 9 in the same way.
(7) When you enter the numeric value of the pattern 9 (Yellow Right), “COMPLETED” is
displayed.
mode.
7-21 Confidential
■ Color registration adjustment chart
Fig. 7-7
7-22 Confidential
1.4.11 Continuous print test (Function code 67)
<Function>
This function allows you to conduct the pick-up and delivery test as printing patterns.
(2) When “SELECT: K 100%” appears on the LCD, select a relevant continuous print pattern
using or button, and then press the OK button.
The available continuous print patterns are shown below.
LCD
SELECT: K 100%
SELECT: C 100%
SELECT: M 100%
SELECT: Y 100%
SELECT: R 100%
SELECT: G 100%
SELECT: B 100%
SELECT: KCMY1%*
SELECT: KCMY5%*
SELECT: Lattice
* KCMY1% and KCMY5% are available only for A4 and Letter.

(3) When “SELECT: A4” appears on the LCD, select a relevant paper size using
or button, and then press the OK button.
The available paper sizes are shown below.
LCD
SELECT: A4
SELECT: LETTER
SELECT: LEGAL
SELECT: A5
SELECT: B6
SELECT: A6
(4) The “PAPER FEED TEST” appears on the LCD, and print of the continuous print pattern
with the selected pick-up test items starts.
mode.
Note:
- The machine continues the test printing until there is no paper in a tray. Press the Cancel
button to stop if you check the paper feeding and ejecting operations. (Printing is resumed
when paper is loaded in the tray.)
- In the case that the error occurs during test printing, the test printing is stopped. (Printing
is resumed when the error is cleared.)
- To clear the error, remove the error factors, and then press the Go button.
7-23 Confidential
■ Continuous print pattern
SELECT: K 100% SELECT: C 100% SELECT: M 100% SELECT: Y 100%
SELECT: R 100% SELECT: G 100% SELECT: B 100%
SELECT: KCMY1% SELECT: KCMY5% SELECT: Lattice
Fig. 7-8
7-24 Confidential
1.4.12 LED test pattern print (Function code 68)
<Function>
This function allows you to print the LED ASSY test pattern and check the quality of the LED
ASSY and if it is lifted from the drum.
Note:
You can check scratches and smears on the LED by performing the continuous print test.
(Refer to “1.4.11 Continuous print test (Function code 67)” in this chapter.)
(2) When “M68_L” is displayed on the LCD, press the OK button.
The available test patterns are shown below.
LCD Description
M68_L Vertical/horizontal dot loss check pattern
“PRINTING” is displayed on the LCD, and the LED test pattern is printed on a sheet.
Note:
When printing fails, a relevant error is displayed on the LCD. When the error factors
are removed and the Go button is pressed, the machine automatically recovers to the
re-executable state. “PRINTING” is displayed on the LCD, and the test pattern is
printed on a sheet.
mode.
table below.
TONER EMPTY # * Replace the empty toner cartridge and press the Go button to
clear the error. Perform the LED test pattern print again.
Cover is Open Close the top cover.
No Paper Replenish paper, and press the Go button to clear the error.
Jam Tray1 Remove the jammed paper, and press the Go button to clear
the error.
Jam Rear Remove the jammed paper, and press the Go button to clear
the error.
* # indicates the toner color (K, Y, M, or C) of which cartridge became empty.
7-25 Confidential
■ LED test pattern (M68_L)
Fig. 7-9
7-26 Confidential
1.4.13 Frame pattern print (Function code 69)
<Function>
This function allows you to print the external periphery frame pattern on a sheet and check if
there is print deflection and/or loss.
(1) Load Letter-size paper on the paper tray.
the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. “PRINTING” is displayed on the
LCD, and the frame pattern (see the figure below) is printed on a sheet.
When printing fails, a relevant error is displayed on the LCD. When the error factors are
removed and the Go button is pressed, the machine automatically recovers to the
re-executable state. When the OK button is pressed, “PRINTING” is displayed on the
LCD, and the frame pattern is printed on a sheet.
mode.
table below.
clear the error. Perform the frame pattern print again.
the error.
the error.
7-27 Confidential
Fig. 7-10
7-28 Confidential
1.4.14 Color test pattern (Function code 71)
<Function>
This function allows you to print the pattern of each color and check if there is any smear on or
failure in the belt unit, develop roller, and exposure drum, etc.
(2) When “2D3S YCMK__A” is displayed on the LCD, press the or button to select an
appropriate print pattern, and press the OK button.
(3) “PRINTING” is displayed on the LCD, and the color test pattern is printed.
The available print patterns are shown below.
LCD Description
2D3S YCMK_ _A One sheet for each color with Total 4 sheets
full page print mode*
2D3S MCYK 4-color horizontal band Total 1 sheet
2D3S Y Yellow Total 1 sheet
2D3S C Cyan Total 1 sheet
2D3S M Magenta Total 1 sheet
2D3S K Black Total 1 sheet
* In the full page print mode, the cleaning operation is performed between printing of M
and K.
When printing fails, a relevant error is displayed on the LCD. When the error factors are
removed and the Go button is pressed, the machine automatically recovers to the
re-executable state. “PRINTING” is displayed on the LCD, and the color test pattern is printed.
(4) When printing is finished, the screen returns to the print pattern display. To print the solid
color test pattern again, press the OK button.
(5) Press the Cancel button to return to the machine to the initial state of the maintenance mode.
table below.
clear the error. Perform the color test pattern print again.
the error.
the error.
7-29 Confidential
■ Color test pattern
YCMK_ _A MCYK
Y C M K
Fig. 7-11
7-30 Confidential
1.4.15 Sensitivity adjustment of density sensor (Function code 72)
<Function>
This function allows you to print the patch data for density sensor sensitivity adjustment on the
belt unit and measure the density with the density sensor. The characteristics of the density
sensor are calculated based on the value measured by the density sensor, and the parameter
is adjusted upon color density adjustment.
of the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. “PLEASE WAIT” is displayed on
the LCD.
(2) When the parameter is obtained without errors, the machine returns to the initial state of
the maintenance mode.
table below.
FAILED Remove the error factors with the following operations and
press the Go button to clear the error.
- Re-insert the toner cartridge in the correct position.
- Replace the toner cartridge.
- Replace the drum unit.
- Replace the belt unit.
- Replace the registration sensor holder ASSY.
clear the error. Perform the sensitivity adjustment of the density
sensor again.
Replace Toner Replace the toner cartridge.
the error.
the error.
* # indicates the toner color (Y, M, or C) of which cartridge became empty.
7-31 Confidential
1.4.16 Setting by country (Function code 74)
<Function>
This function allows you to customize the EEPROM according to language, function settings,
and worker switch settings.
Note:
If you replace the main PCB, be sure to carry out this procedure.
the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. The present customizing code is
displayed.
(2) Enter the upper 2 digits of the country setting code that you want to set.
Press the or button to enter the first digit and press the OK button, and the cursor
moves to the second digit.
Press the or button to enter the second digit and press the OK button, and the
cursor moves to the fourth digit.
Note:
When the upper 2 digits of an invalid country setting code are entered, the setting is
ignored, and the cursor returns to the first digit.
(3) Enter the lower 2 digits of the country setting code that you want to set.
Press the or button to enter the third and fourth digits (in the range from 00 to 50)
and press the Go button.
(4) The new setting is saved, and “PARAMETER INIT” is displayed on the LCD. After the
setting is saved, the machine returns to the initial state of the maintenance mode.
7-32 Confidential
■ Setting by country code list
Country HL-3040CN HL-3070CW HL-3045CN HL-3075CW
USA 0001 0101 0001 0101
Canada 0002 0102 0002 0102
Chile 0036 0136 --- ---
Argentina --- 0136 --- ---
Germany 0004 0104 --- ---
UK 0004 0104 --- ---
France/Belgium/Netherlands 0005 0105 --- ---
Italy 0016 0116 --- ---
Iberia 0016 0116 --- ---
Switzerland 0004 0104 --- ---
Pan-Nordic 0007 0107 --- ---
Russia 0004 --- --- ---
EEU General 0004 0104 --- ---
Israel 0017 --- --- ---
Australia/New Zealand 0006 0106 0006 0106
Singapore 0006 0106 --- ---
Gulf 0006 0106 --- ---
Turkey 0006 0106 --- ---
India 0045 0145 --- ---
Korea 0006 --- --- ---
China 0020 0120 --- ---

* Country codes are subject to change without notice.
Note:
The above information is as of August 2013. Please confirm the latest firmware information
which is available from your local Brother Customer Service.
7-33 Confidential
1.4.17 Sensitivity adjustment of registration mark sensor and check of belt
surface (Function code 75)
<Function>
This function makes the registration mark sensor to adjust its sensitivity compulsory. This
allows you to check if the registration mark sensor works properly. This function makes the
machine to check the surface of the belt unit by using the registration mark sensor as well.
the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. After “REGI_SENS ADJUST” is
displayed on the LCD, “REGI ADJ-BELTOFF” is displayed.
(2) Press the or button to select the appropriate item.
(3) Press the Go button, and then the sensitivity adjustment is started. Upon completion of
this adjustment, the “OK” appears on the LCD.
mode.
LCD Description
REGI ADJ - BELTOFF Adjust the sensitivity of the registration mark sensor when the
belt unit is not operated. This is to check whether the
registration mark sensor’s operation is okay or not.
REGI BELT CHECK Check whether there is no scratch on the surface of the belt unit
within the detectable range of registration mark sensor.
REGI ADJ&CHECK Adjust the sensitivity of the registration mark sensor when the
belt unit is operated. (This adjustment is the same as the
operation before the color registration.)
Note:
- If you press the Go button during the sensitivity adjustment or after the error message
appears on the LCD, the sensitivity adjustment is started again.
- In the case that the error occurs, refer to the next page to check the error description and
the way to solve it.
7-34 Confidential
■ Error display when “REGI ADJ-BELTOFF” is executed
Error messages Description Solution
REGI_ADJ:NG Registration mark Execute the adjustment of color registration

sensor failure (manual).
(Refer to “Adjustment of color registration
(Function code 66)” in this chapter.)
Replace the belt unit.
Replace the main PCB ASSY.
Replace the engine PCB ASSY.
Replace the registration sensor holder ASSY.
■ Error display when “REGI BELT CHECK” or “REGI ADJ&CHECK” is executed
Error messages Description Solution
REGI L:XX REGI R:OK Error occurs on the registration Execute the adjustment of
mark L sensor. color registration (manual).
If the error occurs again,
REGI L:OK REGI R:XX Error occurs on the registration replace the belt unit.
mark R sensor. (Refer to “Adjustment of
REGI L:XX REGI R:XX Error occurs on the registration color registration
mark L sensor and registration (Function code 66)” in this
mark R sensor. chapter.)
* XX shows the number of error times (1 to 999) when a scratch is detected on the
surface of the belt unit. If the number of times is larger, the condition of the belt unit is
worse.
7-35 Confidential
1.4.18 Printout of maintenance information (Function code 77)
<Function>
This function allows you to print a list of all maintenance information including printer coverage
information. The items are those listed in the second page of the Printer Settings.
The following items are printed on the maintenance information only.
Average Coverage Total: Accumulated coverage

Current: Coverage by the toner cartridge which is currently used
Engine Sensor Log Operation logs of the following sensors located in the paper path.
MN: Registration front sensor
RS: Registration rear sensor
EJ: Eject front sensor
ER: Eject rear sensor
Drum Information Number of prints and count value of the drum which is
currently used.
Power On Time Elapsed time while the power is ON.
Power On Count Number of times when the power is turned ON.
Current/Previously Used The number of printed pages of the current toner cartridge
and the previous toner cartridge on each color.
Current Waste Toner The number of printed pages of the current waste toner box.
Developing Bias The current developing bias voltage on each color.
Status Log Information for those in charge of development
Temperature/Humidity Ambient temperature/ humidity during printing
Note:
The error data items stored in the error history are different from those in the second page
of Printer Settings.
(2) Upon completion of printing, the machine returns to the initial state of the maintenance mode.
7-36 Confidential
■ Maintenance information
Fig. 7-12
7-37 Confidential
1.4.19 Operational check of fans (Function code 78)
<Function>
This function is to check whether each of fans is operating correctly or not. The operation of
the following fans is checked respectively, and their operating states (rotation speed 100 %,
rotation speed 50 %, or OFF) are displayed.
LCD Parts name Description
FU Main fan Evacuate hot air of the fuser unit.
PS LV fan Evacuate hot air of the Low-voltage power supply PCB.
(2) Press the Go button to check the next item. For operation check, spin or stop fans
actually on each item.
(3) Press the Cancel button in any process of the display cycle. The machine returns to the
Fig. 7-13
■ Location of fans
Main fan
LV fan
Exhaust
Fig. 7-14
7-38 Confidential
1.4.20 Display of the machine’s log (Function code 80)
<Function>
This function allows you to view the counter information. The display items are shown in the
table below.
LCD Description
Serial USB: Serial number

CDRUM: Number of accumulated rotations of cyan drum
CDRM_PG: Number of printed pages by cyan drum
CDRM_CH: Number of times the cyan drum unit has been replaced
MDRUM: Number of accumulated rotations of magenta drum
MDRM_PG: Number of printed pages by magenta drum
Drum MDRM_CH: Number of times the magenta drum unit has been replaced
related
items YDRUM: Number of accumulated rotations of yellow drum
YDRM_PG: Number of printed pages by yellow drum
YDRM_CH: Number of times the yellow drum unit has been replaced
KDRUM: Number of accumulated rotations of black drum
KDRM_PG: Number of printed pages by black drum
KDRM_CH: Number of times the black drum unit has been replaced
CTN_PG1: Number of printed pages by cyan toner
CTN_PG2: Number of printed pages before previous reset of cyan toner
CTN_ERM: Remaining toner amount detected by the cyan toner sensor
CTN_RRM: Remaining toner amount calculated by the number of
rotations of the cyan develop roller
CTN_CH: Number of times the cyan toner cartridge has been replaced
MTN_PG1: Number of printed pages by magenta toner
MTN_PG2: Number of printed pages before previous reset of magenta toner
MTN_ERM: Remaining toner amount detected by the magenta toner sensor
Toner
MTN_RRM: Remaining toner amount calculated by the number of rotations
related
items
of the magenta develop roller
MTN_CH: Number of times the magenta toner cartridge has been replaced
YTN_PG1: Number of printed pages by yellow toner
YTN_PG2: Number of printed pages before previous reset of yellow toner
YTN_ERM: Remaining toner amount detected by the yellow toner sensor
YTN_RRM: Remaining toner amount calculated by the number of
rotations of the yellow develop roller
YTN_CH: Number of times the yellow toner cartridge has been replaced
KTN_PG1: Number of printed pages by black toner
KTN_PG2: Number of printed pages before previous reset of black toner
7-39 Confidential
LCD Description
KTN_ERM: Remaining toner amount detected by the black toner sensor

Toner
related KTN_RRM: Remaining toner amount calculated by the number of
items rotations of the black develop roller
KTN_CH: Number of times the black toner cartridge has been replaced
WTNR_PG: Printed pages by waste toner box
WTNR_CH: Number of times the waste toner box has been replaced
BCLN: Number of accumulated rotations of the cleaning roller
BELT_PG: Printed pages by belt unit
Replacing
part related BELT_CH: Number of times the belt unit has been replaced
items
PFK1_PG: Printed pages by paper feeding kit
PFK1_CH: Number of times the paper feeding kit has been replaced
FUSR_PG: Printed pages by fuser unit
FUSR_CH: Number of times the fuser unit has been replaced
CCVRGUSI: Average cyan coverage % (Toner in use)
CCVRGACC: Average cyan coverage % (Accumulated)
MCVRGUSI: Average magenta coverage % (Toner in use)
Average
print rate MCVRGACC: Average magenta coverage % (Accumulated)
related YCVRGUSI: Average yellow coverage % (Toner in use)
items *1
YCVRGACC: Average yellow coverage % (Accumulated)
KCVRGUSI: Average black coverage % (Toner in use)
KCVRGACC: Average black coverage % (Accumulated)
TTL_PG: Total number of printed pages
TTL_CO: Total number of color printed pages
TTL_MO: Total number of monochrome printed pages
Print pages
related TTL_CI: Cyan printed pages
items
TTL_MI: Magenta printed pages
TTL_YI: Yellow printed pages
TTL_KI: Black printed pages
Picked-up TR1_PG: Number of pages picked up from the paper tray
pages by
tray MN_PG: Number of pages picked up from the manual feed slot
A4+LTR: Number of A4/Letter size sheets picked up

LG+A4L: Number of Legal/A4 long size sheets picked up
Picked-up
pages by B5+EXE: Number of B5/Executive size sheets picked up
paper size ENVLOP: Number of envelopes picked up
A5: Number of A5 size (including A5R) sheets picked up
OTHER: Number of other-size (including JIS B6) sheets picked up
*1
Average print rate: Print area/ printable area
7-40 Confidential
LCD Description
PLTNRE: Printed pages of plain, thin, and recycled paper
TKTRBD: Printed pages of thick, thicker, and bond paper
Print pages
by paper ENVTYP: Printed pages of envelope, envelope thick, and
type*2 envelope thin
HAGAKI: Printed pages of Hagaki
LABEL: Printed pages of label
CDEV_BIAS: Cyan developing bias voltage (Unit:V)
Developing MDEV_BIAS: Magenta developing bias voltage (Unit:V)
bias related
items YDEV_BIAS: Yellow developing bias voltage (Unit:V)
KDEV_BIAS: Black developing bias voltage (Unit:V)
Power POWER: Power distribution time
distribution
time PWRCNT: Number of times that the power is turned ON
TTL_JAM: Total number of times when a jam occurs

Jam related TR1_JAM: Number of times when a jam occurs at the paper tray
items IN_JAM: Number of times when a jam occurs inside the machine
RE_JAM: Number of times when a jam occurs at the ejecting
HODN_ER: Number of times when discharge detection error
occurs due to smear on the corona wire
Number of
error FUSR_ER: Number of times that fuser unit error occurs
occurrences
MTLK_ER: Number of times that motor lock error occurs
(Not used)
MACHINEERR_##:*3 Machine error ##: Error code/number of occurrences
Error log 4
related ENGERR##: * Engine error ##: Error level (2 bytes),
items large classification code (2 bytes),
detailed classification code (2 bytes)
*2
The recording paper type specified in the printer driver setting. It is not necessarily
matched with the type of the actually fed paper.
*3
01 to 10 are entered in ## in chronological order. When you press the OK button as the
machine error history is displayed, the page counter values when the errors occurred are
displayed. When you press the OK button again, the machine error history is displayed
again.
Note:
The error data items stored in the error history are different from those in the second
page of Printer Settings.
*4 01 to 10 are entered in ## in chronological order. When you press the OK button as the
engine error history is displayed, TM: elapsed time (minute) from the previous error and BT:
the number of times when the power is ON are displayed. When you press the OK button
again, the engine error history is displayed again.
7-41 Confidential
of the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button.
(2) Each time the Go button is pressed, next log information item appears on the LCD in the
order. If pressing the Back button, the previous log information appears.
(3) Press the Cancel button to return the machine to the initial state of the maintenance
mode.
Note:
If you press the OK button while an error code of MACHINEERR or ENGERR is displayed
on the LCD, you can check the page counter value at the time when this error occurred.
Press the OK button again to return to the error log display.
7-42 Confidential
1.4.21 Error code indication (Function code 82)
<Function>
This function displays an error code of the machine on the LCD.
the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. The machine displays “MACHINE
ERROR X X” on the LCD.
(2) Press the Cancel button to return the machine to the initial state of the maintenance mode.
7-43 Confidential
1.4.22 Developing bias voltage correction (Function code 83)
<Function>
This function performs developing bias voltage correction to fix the density of each color toner
when printed color is not correct.
Note:
Before this function is performed, there is a need that the Sensitivity adjustment of density
sensor (maintenance mode 72) has been done more than once. When performing this
maintenance mode 83 after replacing the main PCB, make sure to perform the Sensitivity
adjustment of density sensor (maintenance mode 72) first.
the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. The machine displays “PLEASE
WAIT” on the LCD and starts the developing bias voltage correction.
(2) Upon completion of the developing bias voltage correction, the machine returns to the
When any of the following error messages is displayed, take a relevant measure given in
the table below.
FAILED Remove the error factors with the following operations and
press the Go button to clear the error.
- Re-insert the toner cartridge in the correct position.
- Replace the toner cartridge.
- Replace the drum unit.
- Replace the belt unit.
- Replace the registration sensor holder ASSY.
TONER EMPTY # * Replace the empty toner cartridge and press the Go button to clear
the error. Perform the developing bias voltage correction again.
Replace Toner Replace the toner cartridge.
the error.
the error.
* # indicates the toner color (Y, M, or C) of which cartridge became empty.
Note:
Any panel operation is invalid during the developing bias voltage correction.
7-44 Confidential
1.4.23 Exit from the maintenance mode (Function code 99)
<Function>
This function allows you to exit from the maintenance mode. If the error related to the fuser
unit occurs, the error is cleared. (Refer to “2.5 How to Recover from Errors of the Fuser Unit” in
this chapter.)
the maintenance mode. Then, press the OK button. The machine exits from the
maintenance mode and return to the ready state.
7-45 Confidential
2. OTHER SERVICE FUNCTIONS
2.1 Not-disclosed-to-users Function Menus Enabled by

Pressing Button (s) When Turning the Machine On
The following settings and functions will be available by holding down the specified button (s)
while turning the machine on.
■ Press one button when turning the machine on
Panel operation Function
Go Not used
Secure Print Not used
Back Not used
(-) Hex dump mode*
(+) Not used
OK Don’t use
Cancel Not used
* You can print data from the computer as hexadecimal code. It is useful to analyze print data
itself whether it is okay or not.
■ Press two buttons at the same time when turning the machine on
OK Back Don’t use
Go (+) Not used
Go Back Engine non-startup mode*
(-) (+) Don’t use
(-) OK Don’t use
Go OK Not used
Go Cancel Flash ROM updates mode

(UPD file/Model classification is available.)
OK (+) Obtain the wireless LAN MAC address (Ethernet address).

* This mode is to start-up the machine without using the engine. When the error related to the
engine occurs, you can ignore the error and get the error history or the other counter
information though it is impossible to print. When the machine doesn’t work in case that the
connection failure between the main controller and the engine controller occurs, it is possible
to update the main controller itself to recover from the failures.
7-46 Confidential
■ Press the or button as holding down the Go button in the ready state
Go (+) Parts life reset mode for the periodical replacement parts
(Refer to “2.3 Parts Life Reset Function” in this chapter.)
Go (-) Not-disclosed-to-users functions

(Refer to “1.4.9 Not-disclosed-to-users functions (Function
code 45)” in this chapter.)
■ Press the Cancel button as holding down the Secure Print button while the top
cover is opened
Secure Print Cancel Develop roller counter reset mode (Refer to “2.2 Develop
Roller Counter Reset Function” in this chapter.)
7-47 Confidential
2.2 Develop Roller Counter Reset Function
This function is to manually perform the operation same as the one when a toner cartridge is
replaced with a new one. The purpose of this function is to provide a means to resolve an
error when a new toner cannot be recognized by the product, and the LCD display fails to be
cleared.
■ Pressing the two buttons at the same time while the top cover is opened
Secure Print Cancel Menus of the develop roller counter reset
(1) Press the Secure Print and Cancel buttons at the same
time when the top cover is open.
(2) “K. TNR-STD” appears on the LCD.

Press the or button to select the appropriate toner
cartridge, and then press the OK button.
LCD Description
K.TNR-STD Reset the develop roller counter of standard
black toner cartridge.
K.TNR-STR Reset the develop roller counter of starter
black toner cartridge.
C.TNR-STD Reset the develop roller counter of standard
cyan toner cartridge.
C.TNR-STR Reset the develop roller counter of starter
cyan toner cartridge.
M.TNR-STD Reset the develop roller counter of standard
magenta toner cartridge.
M.TNR-STR Reset the develop roller counter of starter
magenta toner cartridge.
Y.TNR-STD Reset the develop roller counter of standard
yellow toner cartridge.
Y.TNR-STR Reset the develop roller counter of starter
yellow toner cartridge.
(3) Once “OK?” appears on the LCD; press OK button.
(4) The develop roller counter is reset.
(5) The machine returns to the state in which the top cover is
open.
Note:
- If there is no operation for 30 seconds or more, the machine automatically returns to step (1).
- While starter toner is also displayed on the LCD, make sure to select standard toner.
7-48 Confidential
2.3 Parts Life Reset Function
This function is used to reset the relevant part counter and set +1 to the replacement counter
when the user replaced the part with the correct procedure, and also used to forcibly reset the
relevant part counter when an error cannot be resolved because the user did not replace the
part with the correct procedure.
■ Pressing the two buttons in the ready state
Press (+) as holding Menus of the parts life reset

down Go button. (Resets the counter of the periodical replacement parts or
consumable parts and counts up the number of replacement
times by 1.)
(1) Press the Go and buttons at the same time in the
ready state.
(2) The “Drum Unit” will appear on the LCD. Select the
applicable periodical replacement part or consumable
part by pressing the or button and press the OK
button.
<Periodical replacement parts or consumable part are
indicated on the LCD>
- Drum Unit
- Belt Unit
- PF Kit1
- Fuser Unit
(3) Only when you select the drum unit, press the or
button to select the relevant drum color, and press the OK
button.
(4) The “OK?” will appear on the LCD. Then, press the OK
button.
(5) The machine implements clearing the counter.
(6) The machine returns to the ready state.
Note:
- All replacement parts are always indicated on the LCD even though their lives do not
reach the end of life.
- The machine returns to the ready state automatically if no panel operation is implemented
for 30 seconds.
7-49 Confidential
2.4 Printout of Printer Settings
The machine prints “PRINTER SETTINGS.” The printer settings of wired network model
consist of 3 pages, and those of wireless LAN model consist of maximum 4 pages (when both
the wired LAN and wireless LAN are ON).
All pages have following items in common; Title, Model name, Serial number.
(1) Press the OK button three times when the machine is in the ready state.
(2) The machine displays “Printing” on the LCD, and starts to print. Upon completion of
printing, the machine returns to the ready state.
Fig. 7-15
7-50 Confidential
■ Printer settings (Page 1)
This page includes various setting information of the machine. Each item is indicated when it
fulfills the condition.
■ Printer settings (Page 2)

This page includes the printer information and the maintenance information in the following
order.
(1) Printer information
The following items are indicated in the order.
1) Main Controller Main ROM Version
(Main controller firmware version)
2) Main Controller Sub ROM Version
(Sub firmware (GDI or PCL/PS) version)
3) PictBridge Program Version (Wireless LAN model only)
4) RAM Size (MB)
(2) Maintenance information

1) Consumable information/Periodical replacement part information
The printable pages remained for the part is indicated. Also, the percentage of life
remained over the total printable pages is indicated in numerical value and bar graph.
A sample indication (PF Kit 1) is as follows:
From the top left, the parts name, the number of printable pages remained, and the
percentage of life remained are indicated. The column graph shows the percentage
of the remaining life, and one block indicates 2%.
Fig. 7-16
The consumable parts and periodical replacement parts indicated are as follows:
- Toner Cartridge (K, Y, M and C are separated and total 4 cartridges)
- Drum Unit (K, Y, M and C are separated and total 4 units)
- Belt Unit
- PF Kit1
- Fuser Unit
7-51 Confidential
■ Life of drum unit
< How to read the drum unit life >
- It initially indicates 100% and gradually decreases.
- It indicates 10% when the “Drum End Soon” appears on the LCD.
< How to calculate the drum unit life >
The drum unit life is based on the “drum counter” or the “number of drum rotations”.
The drum counter is based on the total printed pages on each drum unit. This total
printed pages should be reset every time you replace the drum unit with a new one.
(Refer to “2.3 Parts Life Reset Function” in this chapter.) Basically this amount is equal to
the assured printable pages of the drum unit.
If the developing bias voltage correction or color registration adjustment is performed
frequently, however, only the number of drum rotations increases, and the “page counter
based on the number of drum rotation” exceeds the “drum counter” based on the total
printed page.
Refer to the calculation of the drum unit life based on the number of drum rotation below;
< How to calculate the page counter >
The number of drum rotations for the first page printed is about 28.
The number of drum rotations per one page for the second or later page printed
(continuous printing) is 5.
Page counter based on the number of drum rotations = {Number of drum rotations for the
first page printed + [Number of drum rotations per one page for the second or later page
printed x (Number of pages in continuous printing - 1)]} / 28
(* The number of drum rotations per one page continuous printing.)
Example: Starts to print when the machine is in the Ready state.
Continuous printing Page counter based on the number of drum rotations (Pages)
1 page/job {28 + [5 x (1 - 1)]} / 28 = 1
2 pages/job {28 + [5 x (2 - 1)]} / 28 = 1.18
18 pages/job {28 + [5 x (18 - 1)]} / 28 = 4.04
If you leave the machine without printing for a long time, the number of drum rotations is
increasing because the developing bias voltage correction and the color registration are
performed. If you print one page per one job every time after leaving the machine without
printing for a long time, the drum unit life is shorter than usual.
The number of drum rotations required for the developing bias voltage correction = 55
rotations.
Example: Performs the developing bias voltage correction and starts to print after leaving
the machine without printing for a long time.
1 page/job {55 + 28 + [5 x (1 - 1)]} / 28 = 2.96
2 pages/job {55 + 28 + [5 x (2 - 1)]} / 28 = 3.14
18 pages/job {55 + 28 + [5 x (18 - 1)]} / 28 = 6.00
The number of drum rotations required for the color registration = 27 rotations
Example: Performs the color registration adjustment and starts to print after leaving the
machine without printing for a long time.
1 page/job {27 + 28 + [5 x (1 - 1)]} / 28 = 1.96
2 pages/job {27 + 28 + [5 x (2 - 1)]} / 28 = 2.14
18 pages/job {27 + 28 + [5 x (18 - 1)]} / 28 = 5.00
If the developing bias voltage correction and the color registration are performed
continuously, the drum unit life is shorter.
7-52 Confidential
2) Counter information, history information
The counter and history information related to the following item are included. When
it reaches the maximum count, each item is no longer counted.
Total Page Count The total number of printed pages.
The maximum count is 1 million pages.
Color Page Count The total number of printed pages with color toners (Y/M/C).
Monochrome The total number of printed pages with black toner only.
Page Count The maximum count is 1 million pages.
Image Count Total The total number of printed pages, and the total number of
printed pages on each color (K/Y/M/C).
Total Pages Printed The total number of printed pages from each of the Manual
Feed and the Tray 1. The maximum count is 1 million
pages. This information is not cleared when the paper
feeding kit is replaced.
Total Pages Printed The total number of printed pages by paper size.
Available paper sizes are A4/Letter, Legal/A4 Long/Folio,
B5/Executive, Envelope, A5 and Others.
Total Pages Printed The total number of printed pages by paper type.
Available paper types are Plain/Thin/Recycled, Thick/
Thicker/Bond, Envelope/Env.Thick, Env.Thin, Label, and
Hagaki. The maximum count is 1 million pages.
Total Paper Jams The number of paper jam occurrence in each of the Tray1,
Inside and Rear. The paper jam occurs when the machine
is turned ON is not counted. The maximum count for each
item is 65,535 times. Total number of jam occurrences is
printed after “Total Paper Jams:.”
Error History The error history including the latest 10 errors and the
number of pages when these errors occur are indicated.
The errors such as Cover is Open, Manual Feed, No Paper
XX and No Tray XX are not included.
Replace Count/ The number of replacement of each of Toner Cartridge (K/
Periodical Y/M/C), Drum Unit (K/Y/M/C), Belt Unit, PF Kit 1, Fuser
replacement part Unit, Waste Toner. The maximum count for each item is
information 255 times.
■ Printer settings (Page 3, Page 4)

These pages include various network settings information of the machine.
Wired network model Page 3: Wired Network Information
Wireless LAN model LAN: Wired Enable setting = ON and WLAN Enable setting = ON
Page 3: Wired Network Information
Page 4: Wireless Network Information
LAN: Wired Enable setting = ON and WLAN Enable setting = OFF
Page 3: Wired Network Information
Page 4: Not available
LAN: Wired Enable setting = OFF and WLAN Enable setting = ON
Page 3: Wireless Network Information
Page 4: Not available
LAN: Wired Enable setting = OFF and WLAN Enable setting = OFF
Page 3 and 4: Not available
7-53 Confidential
2.5 How to Recover from Errors of the Fuser Unit
How to recover from errors of the fuser unit is to use Function code 99 in the maintenance
mode.
WARNING
When clearing an error, be sure that the fuser unit is cooled down sufficiently. If an error is
cleared while the fuser unit is not cooled down, there is a possibility that the unit might be
unable to be repaired.
7-54 Confidential
2.6 Switching of Return Value of USB No./Support for Banding
<Function>
This function allows you to switch USB transfer speed in the PictBridge mode, switch the
return value of the USB No., and switch controls to resolve banding symptoms.
(1) Press the Go button and button at the same time while the machine is in the ready
state. “PB.USBspeed” is displayed on the LCD.
(2) Select one of the functions in the table below that you want to change the value using the
or button and press the OK or Go button.
LCD Description
PB.Speed=AUTO Switching of the USB transfer speed in the PictBridge mode
USBNo.=ON Changing return value of USB No.
PS.DitherType=0 Switching of PS Dither Pattern
Bd94CrctSub=ON Switching of ON/OFF of 94-mm Banding measure transfer

current correction/DCLN voltage correction
DP.ImpGray=ON Switching of ON/OFF of DirectPrint Color mode-Improve Gray Color
Regi Freq Switching of timing to execute Auto Registration

(HL-3045CN/3075CW only)

(3) Select the value that you want to set using the or button and press the OK or Go
button.
(4) “Accepted” is displayed for approximately 2 second, and the machine goes back to the
ready state.
Note:
After the setting of PB.Speed and USB No., turn OFF the power switch. (The change
will not be applied until the power switch is turned OFF and ON.)
7-55 Confidential
<Details>
Item Description Setting
PB.Speed If the digital camera which a user PB.Speed=AUTO

uses cannot be connected in the Adapts the speed to the capability
PictBridge mode, this function may of the USB device.
make it possible.
PB.Speed=FULL
Fixes the speed to Full Speed.
The capability of the USB device is
not depended on.
USBNo. When the OS of the computer is USBNo. =ON

Windows Vista®, it might not be able Returns the serial No. of the device.
to obtain the serial No. of a USB
device depending on the computer USBNo. =OFF
and USB device. To avoid this Returns “0”.
problem, the return value of the
serial No. is switched to “0.”
PS.DitherType This function is to switch the dither PS.DitherType=0

pattern when printed letters and/or Improves roughness of letters and
slanted lines are not smooth, slanted lines.
and thin lines are rough or uneven.
PS.DitherType=1
Alleviates banding.
Bd94CrctSub This function is to switch ON/OFF of Bd94CrctSub=ON

the transfer current correction/ Transfer current correction/DCLN
DCLN voltage correction voltage correction ON
control (Engine control) for the
94-mm position from the leading Bd94CrctSub=OFF
edge of each page. Transfer current correction/DCLN
voltage correction OFF
DP.ImpGray This function is to switch ON/OFF of DP.ImpGray=ON

the print control for the gray color Improves the symptom that other
when other colors are slightly colors are slightly blended in the
blended in the gray color or the gray gray color.
color is uneven upon printing.
DP.ImpGray=OFF
Improves the unevenness of the
gray color.
Regi Freq This function is to switch the Regi Freq=Mid

(HL-3045CN/ threshold value which is used as the The frequency to execute Auto
3075CW only) timing to execute Auto Registration. Registration is middle.
The threshold value can be
switched in three phases between Regi Freq=High
High, Mid, and Low. The frequency to execute Auto
Registration is high.
Regi Freq=Low
The frequency to execute Auto
Registration is low.
7-56 Confidential
CHAPTER 8
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS & WIRING DIAGRAM
Confidential
CHAPTER 8
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS & WIRING DIAGRAM
This chapter provides the circuit diagrams and wiring diagram for the connections of the PCBs.
CONTENTS
1. CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS.................................................................................8-1
2. WIRING DIAGRAM ....................................................................................8-9
Confidential
1. CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
■ High-voltage Power Supply PCB Circuit Diagram SYS HITEK: SPH-8N35 (1/3)
8-1 Confidential
8-2 Confidential
8-3 Confidential
■ High-voltage Power Supply PCB Circuit Diagram MURATA: MPH3316 (1/3)
8-4 Confidential
8-5 Confidential
8-6 Confidential
■ Low-voltage Power Supply PCB Circuit Diagram (100V)
8-7 Confidential
■ Low-voltage Power Supply PCB Circuit Diagram (200V)
8-8 Confidential
2. WIRING DIAGRAM
■ Wiring Diagram (1/2)
*1
*1 The belt thermistor is not installed depending on the production period due to cost down.
8-9 Confidential
■ Wiring Diagram (2/2)
8-10 Confidential
APPENDIX 1.
WORKER SWITCH (WSW)
This appendix describes the functions of the worker switches.
Each of the firmware switches has eight selectors. You should not allow end users to access all of those
selectors, but you can allow them to access user-accessible selectors which are shaded in the worker
switch tables in this appendix.
Confidential
WORKER SWITCH (WSW)
This appendix describes the functions of the worker switches.
It is not allowed to access all of those selectors, but it is allowed to access the selectors shaded in
the worker switch table.
■ Worker switch
WSW No. Function Refer to:
WSW47 Switching between high-speed USB and full-speed USB App. 1-2
WSW54 PictBridge command delay time (Wireless LAN model only) App. 1-2
WSW55 Interval of time required for the developing bias voltage App. 1-3
correction
WSW56 “Last Job Reprint” function setting App. 1-4
Switching of the display for the coverage of toner cartridge
Switching of the CPU sleep mode
WSW59 Enabling and disabling of transmission of USB serial number App. 1-4
(SN)
WSW63 Font support for Israel App. 1-5
WSW64 Default paper size App. 1-5
WSW65 Default media type App. 1-5
Support for Bond paper
Support for Hagaki
Support for Label
App.1-1 Confidential
The functions and settings for each worker switch (WSW) are described below;
■ WSW47 (Switching between high-speed USB and full-speed USB)
Selector No. Function Setting and Specifications
1
| Not used
7
0: Auto switching between high-speed

Switching between high-speed USB (ver. 2.0) and full-speed USB
8
USB and full-speed USB (ver. 1.1)
1: Fixed to full-speed USB (ver. 1.1)
■ WSW54 (PictBridge command delay time (Wireless LAN model only))
No. 1 2
1 0 0: 100 msec (default)
PictBridge command delay time
0 1: 0 msec
2 1 0: 50 msec
1 1: 200 msec
3
| Not used
8
- Selector 1 and 2: PictBridge command delay time (Wireless LAN model only)
These selectors specify the PictBridge command delay time that applies when the machine
responds to the digital camera connected via PictBridge during negotiation. If the machine fails to
receive data from the digital camera, change the delay time.
■ WSW55 (Interval of time required for the developing bias voltage correction)
0: The developing bias voltage

correction is performed on each
print job.
1-72: The developing bias voltage
1 Interval of time required for the correction is performed when a
| developing bias voltage print job occurs at specified time
8 correction (hour) or later. (72: default)
73-254: Not allowed to set.
255: The developing bias voltage
correction is not performed.
The setting example of the selector number is as follows;

No. 1 2 3 4 8 5 7 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0: The developing bias voltage correction is performed on each print job.
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0: The developing bias voltage correction is performed when a print job
occurs after 24 hours or later.
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0: The developing bias voltage correction is performed when a print job
occurs after 72 hours or later.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1: The developing bias voltage correction is not performed.
- Selector 1 to 8: Interval of time required for the developing bias voltage correction
To keep the density of four colors evenly, the developing bias voltage correction is performed when
a print job occurs at specified time or later.
■ WSW56 ( Function setting 21 )
1
| Not used
2
“Last Job Reprint” 0: Invalid

3
function setting 1: Valid (default)
4
| Not used
5
0: The coverage only for the current toner

Switching of the display for the cartridge
6
coverage of toner cartridge 1: The coverage for all toner cartridges
which had been consumed
7 Not used
Switching of the CPU sleep 0: Invalid

8
mode 1: Valid (default)
- Selector 3: “Last Job Reprint” function setting

This selector prevents Reprint of important data such as the last printed confidential document.
- Selector 6: Switching of the display for the coverage of toner cartridge

This selector specifies the display for the coverage of toner cartridge. Setting this selector to “0”, the
machine displays the coverage only for the current toner cartridge. If this selector sets to “1”, the
machine displays the coverage for all toner cartridge which had been consumed.
- Selector 8: Switching of the CPU sleep mode

This selector specifies the CPU sleep mode ON or OFF.
■ WSW59 (Enabling and disabling of transmission of USB serial number (SN))
Enabling and disabling of 0: Transmit USB serial No.

1 transmission of USB serial (default)
number (SN) 1: Not transmit USB serial No.
2
| Not used
8
- Selector 1: Enabling and disabling of transmission of USB serial number (SN)

In the default, this machine transmits the USB serial number to the connected computer. If Windows
Vista® runs on the computer, transmission of the USB serial number from this machine might cause
a failure. In such a case, this selector is used to disable transmission.
■ WSW63 (Font support for Israel)
1
| Not used
7
0: Disable
8 Font support for Israel
1: Enable (default)
- Selector 8: Font support for Israel

To enable the font support for Israel, set this selector to “1”.
■ WSW64 (Setting the Default paper size)
1
| Not used
6
No. 12
7 0 0: Letter
| Default paper size 0 1: A4
8 1 0: Reserve
1 1: Reserve
■ WSW65 (Setting the paper support)
No. 1 2
1 0 0: Plain Paper
Default media type 0 1: Thin Paper
2 1 0: Reserve
1 1: Reserve
0: Not supported
3 Support for Bond paper
1: Supported
0: Not supported
4 Support for Hagaki
1: Supported
5 Not used
0: Not supported
6 Support for Label
1: Supported
7
Not used
8
■ WSW66 (Reserved *Change of the setting is prohibited)
1 Reserved
| * Change of the setting is
8 prohibited.
1 Reserved
8 prohibited.
1 Reserved
8 prohibited.
1 Reserved
8 prohibited.
1 Reserved
8 prohibited.
APPENDIX 2.
DELETION OF USER SETTING INFORMATION etc.
This appendix provides instructions on how to delete user setting information etc. recorded in the machine.
Confidential
DELETION OF USER SETTING INFORMATION etc.
In this machine, the user setting information is stored in the EEPROM and flash memory of the main
PCB. You can delete all the data listed below at a time with the procedure given below.
- Information related to Net

- User setting information
- Computer usage limit information (Wireless LAN model only)
(1) Disconnect the network cable from the printer.
(2) Press the + or - button in the ready state until “Reset Menu” appears on the LCD.
(3) Press the OK button. The “Reset Printer” will appear on the LCD.
(4) Press the + and Cancel buttons at the same time. The “Setting Reset” will appear on the LCD.
(5) Press the OK button. The “Reset Printer?” will appear on the LCD.
(6) Press the OK button again, and the machine automatically restarts, the user setting information
is deleted, and the machine goes back to the ready state.
APPENDIX 3.
SERIAL NUMBERING SYSTEM
Confidential
SERIAL NUMBERING SYSTEM
Each machine has a serial number label for the machine itself and property labels for some other
parts. Refer to the information below for the meaning of the serial number and property codes and
the location of each label.
■ Serial number labels for the machine itself
Serial number A9J111101
Model number Serial number (6-digit)

Manufacturing factory No.
Year of manufacture
9: 2009
0: 2010
Month of manufacture
A: January E: May J: September
B: February F: June K: October
C: March G: July L: November
D: April H: August M: December
Fig. App 3-1
<Location>
Serial number label

Serial number label
Fig. App 3-2 Fig. App 3-3
■ Serial number of the LED ASSY
<Print position>
Serial number
Fig. App 3-4
APPENDIX 4.
SCREW CATALOGUE
Confidential
SCREW CATALOGUE
Taptite bind B Taptite cup S

M3x8 M3x6 SR

M3x10 M3x8 SR
Taptite bind B
M3x12 Shoulder screw
Taptite bind B
Shoulder screw
M4x12
Shoulder screw
Taptite bind S M3
Taptite bind S
M3x5 Taptite pan
Taptite pan B M4x14

Taptite cup B
Taptite cup B
M3x8 Screw pan (S/P washer)
Taptite cup B Screw pan (S/P washer)

M3x10 M4x8 DB
Screw pan (S/P washer)

Screw bind B M3x10
Screw bind
M3x4 Taptite pan (washer)

B M4x12DA
APPENDIX 5.
REFERENCES
Confidential
REFERENCES
This page provides reference information.
It is possible to get the full instructions of the subjects by just clicking on the links below.
1. Machine specification
(Refer to “2. SPECIFICATIONS LIST” in Chapter 1.)
2. Paper specification
(Refer to “2.5 Paper” in Chapter 1.)
3. Error codes
(Refer to “2.1 Error Codes” in Chapter 3.)
4. Error message
(Refer to “2.3 Error Cause and Remedy” in Chapter 3.)
5. Pitch indicated in roller image

(Refer to “4.2 Pitch Indicated in Roller Image” in Chapter 3.)
6. Periodical maintenance parts

(Refer to “3.1 Periodical Maintenance Parts” in Chapter 4.)
7. Reset parts life

APPENDIX 6.
GLOSSARY
Confidential
GLOSSARY
■ ACRONYMS AND TECHNICAL TERMS
In this manual, the manual specific acronyms and technical terms are used in addition to the
generally used ones. The table below contains typical acronyms and technical terms that are used
throughout this manual.
APIPA Automatic Private IP Addressing K Black (Color)
ASIC Application Specific Integrated LCD Liquid Crystal Display

Circuit
LED Light Emitting Diode
ASSY Assembly LED array The long part which is a part of

LED ASSY and emits LED beams
C Cyan (Color)
CN Connector LM hook Lift-up Motion hook
CPU Central Processing Unit LV Low Voltage
dB decibel LVPS Low Voltage Power Supply
DEV Development M Magenta (Color)
DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module MP Multi-Purpose
dpi dots per inch N/A Not Applicable
DX Duplex NC* Network Circuit
EEPROM Electronically Erasable and NVRAM Nonvolatile Random Access

Programmable Read Only Memory
Memory
OPC Organic Photo Conductor
FR Feed Roller PF Paper Feed
FU Fuser PP gear Pressure Plate gear
HEX Hexadecimal ppm pages per minute
HUM Humidity PU Pick-Up roller
HV High Voltage RAM Random Access Memory
HVPS High Voltage Power Supply SP Spare Parts
IEEE Institute of Electrical and TE Toner Empty

1284 Electronic Engineers 1284
THM Thermal
IF Interface TN Toner
IPv4 Internet Protocol Version 4 TR Transfer
IPv6 Internet Protocol Version 6 Y Yellow (Color)
* Excluding the acronym shown on the wiring diagram or circuit diagram.

Brother HL-3040CN-HL3045CN-HL3070CW-HL3075CW Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Brother HL-3040CN-HL3045CN-HL3070CW-HL3075CW Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Brother HL-3040CN-HL3045CN-HL3070CW-HL3075CW Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Color Printer

Read this manual thoroughly before maintenance work.

The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.

Model HL-3040CN HL-3045CN HL-3070CW HL-3075CW

LAN Wired Wired Wireless Wireless

USB host --- --- √ √

© Copyright Brother 2009

All other product and company names mentioned in this manual

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

CHAPTER 2: THEORY OF OPERATION

CHAPTER 3: ERROR INDICATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING

CHAPTER 4: PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

CHAPTER 5: DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

CHAPTER 6: ADJUSTMENTS AND UPDATING OF SETTINGS,

CHAPTER 8: CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS & WIRING DIAGRAM

APPENDIX 1: WORKER SWITCH (WSW)

APPENDIX 2: DELETION OF USER SETTING INFORMATION etc.

APPENDIX 3: SERIAL NUMBERING SYSTEM

APPENDIX 4: SCREW CATALOGUE

For Europe and Other Countries

■ Radio interference (220 to 240 volt model only)

■ EU Directive 2002/96/EC and EN50419

100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard

P.O. Box 6911

Telephone: (908) 704-1700

declares, that the products

Product name: Printer HL-3040CN, HL-3045CN, HL-3070CW and HL-3075CW

Model number: HL-30C

■ Industry Canada Compliance Statement (For Canada)

■ Definitions of Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Memos

Warnings tell you what to do to prevent possible personal injury.

Electrical Hazard icons alert you to a possible electrical shock.

Cautions specify procedures you must follow or avoid to prevent

2. SPECIFICATIONS LIST .............................................................................1-2

Top cover sub ASSY

Top cover arm R

LED head control

Top cover arm L

Paper eject guide ASSY

LVPS unit Main fan ASSY

Fuser eject drive Toner LED

USB direct interface

Access cover Drum develop

<Direct Print feature>

Model HL-3040CN/3045CN HL-3070CW/3075CW

Windows® Windows® 7 Intel® Pentium® 4 or 1GB 1GB 50 MB

Model HL-3070CW HL-3075CW

Part Approximate life (page)

Fuser unit 50,000

Paper feeding kit 50,000

* As for replacement of the periodical maintenance parts, refer to “PERIODICAL

Model All models

Model All models

Paper Input*1 Paper tray 250 sheets

2.5.2 Media specifications

Model All models

Choose the media type

Plain paper Yes Yes Plain Paper

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.